GLE-Class AMG (2017) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free GLE-Class AMG (2017) Mercedes-Benz in PDF.
User questions about GLE-Class AMG (2017) Mercedes-Benz
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Automotive in PDF format for free! Find your manual GLE-Class AMG (2017) - Mercedes-Benz and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. GLE-Class AMG (2017) by Mercedes-Benz.
USER MANUAL GLE-Class AMG (2017) Mercedes-Benz
text_image
GLE Coupe Operator's Manual 2925841901 Order no. P292 0116 13 Part no. 2925841901 Edition A 2017 GLE Coupe Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz
natural_image
Silver Mercedes-Benz SUV parked on a desert road with rocky mountains in the background (no visible text or symbols)GLE Coupe
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
ID
page)
- Bluetooth ^00 is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
- DTS ^TM is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
• Dolby ^™ and MLP ^™ are registered trademarks play of DOLBY Laboratories.
• BabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. - HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
- iPod ^® and iTunes ^® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
- Logic7 ^2 is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries.
- Microsoft® and Windows media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
- SIRIUS ^® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
- HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBliquity Digital Corporation.
- Gracenote ^36 is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
• ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.
④
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.
Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.
This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.
Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps.
This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.
This text indicates a message on the multifunction display/multimedia display.
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Operator's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:
Customer Assistance Center
^* Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on:
- Model
- Order
• Country specification - Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:
- Design
- Equipment
- Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The following are integral components of the vehicle:
• Digital Operator's Manual
• Printed Operator's Manual
- Maintenance Booklet
• Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tablets.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App:
text_image
QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable textApple® iOS
text_image
QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable textAndroid™
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country.
Protecting the environment 2
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 2
Operator's Manual 25
Service and vehicle operation 2
Operating safety 27
QR codes for the rescue card ....
Data stored in the vehicle 2
Information on copyright 31
At a glance 3
Cockpit 32
Instrument cluster 33
Multifunction steering wheel 34
Center console 35
Overhead control panel 3
Door control panel 38
Safety 39
Panic alarm 39
Occupant safety 39
Children in the vehicle 55
Pets in the vehicle 60
Driving safety systems 60
Protection against theft 7
Opening and closing 71
SmartKey 71
Doors 77
Cargo compartment 7
Side windows 83
Sliding sunroof 86
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ....
Correct driver's seat position 91
Seats 91
Steering wheel 97
Mirrors 99
Memory function 102
Lights and windshield wipers ...... 1
Exterior lighting 104
Interior lighting 108
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) 109
Windshield wipers 109
4Climate control 113
Overview of climate control systems ... 113
Operating the climate control systems 117
2 Setting the air vents 122
Driving and parking 124
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 124
Driving 124
DYNAMIC SELECT controller 132
Automatic transmission 132
Refueling 139
Parking 145
Driving tips 148
Driving systems 157
Towing a trailer 199
On-board computer and displays .... 206
Important safety notes 206
Displays and operation 206
Menus and submenus 209
Display messages 220
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 250
Multimedia system 263
General notes 263
8 Important safety notes 263
Function restrictions 263
Operating system 264
Stowage and features 270
Stowage areas 270
Features 277
Maintenance and care 294
Engine compartment 294
ASSYST PLUS 298
4Care 299
Breakdown assistance 306
Where will I find...? 306
Flat tire 306
Battery (vehicle) 311
Jump-starting 313
Towing and tow-starting 316
Fuses 318
Wheels and tires 321
Important safety notes 321
Operation 321
Winter operation 323
Tire pressure 324
Loading the vehicle 331
All about wheels and tires 334
Changing a wheel 341
Wheel and tire combinations 345
Emergency spare wheel 346
Technical data 350
Information regarding technical data ... 350
Vehicle electronics 350
Identification plates 351
Service products and filling capacities 352
Vehicle data 358
Vehicle data for off-road driving 359
Trailer tow hitch 361
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) 168
12 V socket
see Sockets
115 V socket 281
360° camera
Cleaning 303
Display in the multimedia system .. 186
Function/notes 1 85
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message 222
Function/notes 61
Important safety notes 61
Warning lamp 253
Accident
Automatic measures after an accident 54
Activating media mode
General notes 268
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification 118
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) 214
Display message 240
Function/information 194
Trailer towing 197
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating 214
Display message 227
Function/notes 62
Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function
Activating or deactivating 214
Display message 228
Function/notes 67
Important safety notes 67
Warning lamp 261
Active Curve System
Display message 238
Function/notes 171
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) 215
Display message 240
Function/information 197
Trailer towing 199
Active light function 106
ADAPTIVE BRAKE 67
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes 63
Adaptive Damping System
Function/notes 173
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message 234
Function/notes 107
Switching on/off 108
Additives (engine oil) 356
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Adjusting the volume
Audio 20 264
COMAND 264
ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System)
Function/notes 170
Air bags
Deployment 51
Display message 231
Front air bag (driver, front passenger) 45
Important safety notes 44
Introduction 44
Knee bag 45
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 46
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 40
Side impact air bag 46
Window curtain air bag 46
Air filter (display message) 237
AIR FLOW 118
Air vents
Glove box 123
Important safety notes 122
Rear 123
Setting 122
Setting the center air vents 122
Setting the side air vents 123
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIRMATIC package
ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System) 170
Function/notes 169
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ..... 70
Switching off (ATA) 70
Switching the function on/off (ATA) 70
AMG
Adaptive sport suspension system 173
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 218
Approach/departure angle 156
Ashtray 279
Assistance display (on-board computer) 214
Assistance menu (on-board computer) 213
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ...... 298
Hiding a service message 298
Resetting the service interval display 298
Service message 298
Special service requirements ..... 298
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating 70
Function 70
Switching off the alarm 70
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating 214
Display message 238
Function/notes 189
Audio 20
Switching on/off 264
Audio menu (on-board computer)
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message 233
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) 299
Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) 130
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) 129
Automatic headlamp mode 104
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position 135
Changing gear 135
DIRECT SELECT lever 132
Display message 246
Drive program 135
Drive program display 134
Driving tips 135
DYNAMIC SELECT controller ..... 132
Emergency running mode 139
Engaging drive position 134
Engaging neutral 133
Engaging park position automatically 133
Engaging reverse gear 133
Engaging the park position 132
Kickdown 135
Manual shifting 136
Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 218
Overview 132
Problem (malfunction) 139
Pulling away 128
Starting the engine 127
Steering wheel paddle shifters ..... 136
Trailer towing 135
Transmission position display ..... 134
Transmission positions 134
Automatic transmission emergency mode 139
AUX jacks
CD/DVD drive 269
21 Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) 361
B
Back button 264
Bag hook 275
Ball coupling
Installing 201
Removing 205
BAS (Brake Assist System)
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking 74
Important safety notes 74
Replacing 74
Battery (vehicle)
Charging 313
Display message 235
Important safety notes 311
Jump starting 313
Overview 311
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating 214
Display message 240
Notes/function 191
Trailer towing 193
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Blootooth®
Connecting a different mobile phone 268
BlueTEC
Adding DEF 142
BlueTEC (DEF) 355
Bluetooth®
Searching for a mobile phone ...... 267
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Telephony 266
Brake fluid
Display message 227
Notes 356
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Brake lamps
Display message 233
Brakes
ABS 61
Adaptive Brake Assist 63
BAS 61
Brake fluid (notes) 356
Display message 222
Hill start assist 128
Important safety notes 150
Maintenance 151
Parking brake 146
Riding tips 150
61 Warning lamp 252
Breakdown
Where will I find...? 306
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) 33
C
California
Important notice for retail customers and lessees 25
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Care
360° camera 303
Car wash 299
Carpets 305
Display 304
Exhaust pipe 303
Exterior lights 302
Gear or selector lever 304
Interior 304
Matte finish 301
Notes 299
Paint 301
Plastic trim 304
Power washer 300
Rear view camera 303
Roof lining 305
Seat belt 305
Seat cover 305
Sensors 303
Side running board 302
Steering wheel 304
Trim pieces 305
Washing by hand 300
Wheels 301
Windows 302
Wiper blades 302
Wooden trim 305
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes 273
Cargo compartment floor
Important safety notes 276
Opening/closing 276
Stowage well (under) 2 76
Cargo tie down rings 274
CD
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
CD player (on-board computer) ...... 212
Center console
Lower section 36
Upper section 35
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board computer) 216
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ..... 7 1
Child
Restraint system 56
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ..... 59
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors 57
On the front-passenger seat 58
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 58
Top Tether 5
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes 59
Rear doors 60
Children
Special seat belt retractor 5
Cigarette lighter 280
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal 3
Trailer tow hitch 03
Climate control
Automatic climate control (3-zone) 115
Controlling automatically 1 18
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 118
Defrosting the windows 120
Defrosting the windshield 120
Dual-zone automatic climate control 113
General notes 113
Indicator lamp 118
Ionization 122
Maximum cooling 120
Notes on using the automatic climate control 117
Overview of systems 1 13
Problem with the rear window defroster 121
Problems with cooling with air dehumidification 118
Rear control panel 115
Refrigerant 357
Refrigerant filling capacity 358
Setting the air distribution 119
Setting the air vents 1 22
Setting the airflow 119
Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) 118
Setting the temperature 119
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 121
Switching on/off 117
Switching residual heat on/off ..... 121
Switching the rear window defroster on/off 121
Switching the ZONE function on/off 120
Coat hooks 276
Cockpit
Overview 32
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible spare wheel
5 Inflating 349
see Emergency spare wheel
COMAND
02 Switching on/off 264
COMAND display
Cleaning 304
Combination switch 105
Connecting a USB video
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) 209
Controller 264
Convenience closing feature 84
Convenience opening feature 84
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level 297
Display message 234
Filling capacity 357
Important safety notes 356
Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 218
Temperature gauge 207
Warning lamp 259
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright 31
Cornering light function Display message 233
Crash-responsive emergency lighting 109
Crosswind Assist 66
Crosswind driving assistance 66
Cruise control
Activating 158
Activation conditions 158
Cruise control lever 158
Deactivating 159
Display message 243
Driving system 157
Function/notes 157
Important safety notes 157
Storing and maintaining current speed 158
Cup holder
Center console 278
Important safety notes 277
Rear compartment 279
Temperature controlled 278
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) 28
Customer Relations Department ..... 28
D
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting 212
Daytime running lamps
Display message 233
Function/notes 104
Switching on/off (on-board computer) 216
Declarations of conformity 27
DEF
Adding 142
Display message 237
Filling capacity 355
Important safety notes 355
Diagnostics connection 28
Digital speedometer 210
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission 132
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS 298
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 221
Driving systems 238
Engine 234
General notes 220
Hiding (on-board computer) 220
KEYLESS-GO 249
Lights 233
Safety systems 222
SmartKey 249
Tires 244
Vehicle 246
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activating 161
Activation conditions 161
Cruise control lever 160
Display Message 241
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 164
Driving tips 165
Function/notes 159
Important safety notes 159
Setting the specified minimum distance 163
Stopping 162
Switching off 163
Warning lamp 261
Distance recorder
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 261
Distance warning function
Function/notes 62
Warning lamp 261
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board computer) 216
Automatic locking (switch) 78
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) 7 1
Control panel 3 8
Display message 248
Emergency locking 78
Emergency unlocking 78
Important safety notes 77
Opening (from inside) 77
Overview 77
Power closing 78
Drinking and driving 149
Drive program
Automatic transmission 135
SETUP (on-board computer) 218
Drive programs
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ..... 134
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving
Important safety notes 124
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service 299
Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 19 Driving tips
Driving in mountainous terrain
Approach/departure angle 156
Driving lamps
see Daytime running lamps
Driving off-road
see Off-road driving
Driving safety system
Active Brake Assist 62
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ..... 61
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function 67
ADAPTIVE BRAKE 67
Adaptive Brake Assist 63
BAS (Brake Assist System) 61
Distance warning function 62
EBD (electronic brake force distribution) 66
ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program) 64
Important safety information 60
Overview 60
STEER CONTROL 69
Driving system
ADS PLUS 170
AIRMATIC package 169
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 159
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Steering Pilot 165
Parking assist PARKTRONIC 174
Parking Pilot 177
Driving systems
360°camera 185
Active Blind Spot Assist 194
Active Curve System 171
Active Lane Keeping Assist 197
AMG adaptive sport suspension system 173
ATTENTION ASSIST 189
Blind Spot Assist 191
Cruise control 157
Display message 238
Driving Assistance Plus package ... 194
HOLD function 167
Lane Keeping Assist 193
Rear view camera 181
Traffic Sign Assist 190
Automatic transmission 135
Brakes 150
Break-in period 124
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 165
Downhill gradient 150
Drinking and driving 149
Driving in winter 153
Driving on flooded roads 152
Driving on sand 155
Driving on wet roads 152
Driving over obstacles 156
Exhaust check 149
Fuel 148
General 148
Hydroplaning 152
Icy road surfaces 153
Limited braking efficiency on sal- ted roads 151
Off-road driving 154
Off-road fording 152
Snow chains 323
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 124
Tire ruts 155
Towing a trailer 200
Traveling uphill 156
Wet road surface 151
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Display message 2 39
Function/notes 1 68
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 212
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Automatic transmission 132
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating 217
Function/notes 98
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive 9 9
Function/notes 98
Switching on/off 217
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Display message 224
Function/notes 66
ECO display
Function/notes 149
On-board computer 209
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start 130
Automatic engine switch-off 129
Deactivating/activating 130
General information 129
Important safety notes 129
Introduction 129
Emergency
Automatic measures after an accident 54
Emergency release
Driver's door 78
Vehicle 78
Emergency spare wheel
General notes 346
Important safety notes 346
Removing 347
Storage location 347
Stowing 347
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation 51
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate 82
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 25
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp 259
Display message 234
ECO start/stop function 129
Engine number 352
Irregular running 131
Jump-starting 313
Starting (important safety notes) ... 126
Starting problems 131
Starting the engine with the SmartKey 127
Starting via smartphone 127
Starting with KEYLESS-GO 127
Switching off 146
Tow-starting (vehicle) 318
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) 131
Engine oil
Adding 296
Additives 356
Checking the iø level 295
Checking the oil level using the dipstick 296
Display message 236
Filling capacity 356
Notes about oil grades 355
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 295
Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 218
Engine switch-off
see ECO start/stop function
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 218
Characteristics 65
Deactivating/activating 65
Display message 222
Function/notes 64
General notes 64
Important safety information 64
Trailer stabilization 66
Warning lamp 255
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 64
Exhaust check 149
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 303
Exterior lighting see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting 99
Dipping (automatic) 101
Folding in when locking (on-board computer) 217
Folding in/out (automatically) ..... 1
Folding in/out (electrically) 100
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 100
Setting 100
Storing settings (memory function) 102
Storing the parking position ..... 101
Eyeglasses compartment 272
F
Favorites
Overview 265
Filler cap
see Refueling
Flat tire
MOExtended tires 307
Preparing the vehicle 306
TREFIT kit 308
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats 292
Fog lamps (extended range) 107
Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back 273
Fording
Off-road 152
On flooded roads 152
Frequencies
Mobile phone 350
Two-way radio 350
Fuel
Additives 354
Consumption statistics 209
Displaying the current consumption 210
Displaying the range 2 10
Driving tips 1 48
Fuel gauge 33
Grade (gasoline) 353
Important safety notes 353
Low outside temperatures 354
Problem (malfunction) 142
Quality (diesel) 354
Refueling 139
Tank content/reserve fuel 353
Fuel filler flap
Opening 141
Fuel filter (display message) 237
0 Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board computer) 210
Fuel tank
Capacity 353
Problem (malfunction) 142
Fuses
Allocation chart 318
Before changing 319
Dashboard fuse box 319
Fuse box in the engine compartment 319
Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 320
Important safety notes 318
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory 292
General notes 289
Important safety notes 290
Opening/closing the garage door .. 292
Problems when programming ..... 2 91
Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) 290
Synchronizing the rolling code ..... 291
Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 218
Genuine parts 24
Glove box 271
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) 339
H
Hazard warning lamps 106
Head restraints
Adjusting 93
Adjusting (electrically) 94
Adjusting (rear) 94
Installing/removing (rear) 94
Luxury 94
Headlamps
Fogging up 108
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher 105
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist 107
Display message 233
Switching on/off 105
Highway mode 107
Hill start assist 128
HOLD function
Deactivating 167
Display message 239
Function/notes 1 67
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
Hood
Closing 2 95
Display message 248
Important safety notes 294
Opening 294
Horn 32
Hydroplaning 152
|
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer 70
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Insect protection on the radiator ....
Instrument cluster
Overview 33
Warning and indicator lamps 33
Instrument cluster lighting 206
Intelligent Light System
Activating/deactivating 216
Overview 106
Interior lighting
Automatic control 109
Emergency lighting 109
General notes 108
Manual control 108
Overview 108
Reading lamp 108
iPod®
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
J
Jack
Storage location 306
Using 342
Jump starting (engine) 313
K
Key positions
SmartKey 125
Start/Stop button 125
KEYLESS-GO
Activating 72
Convenience closing feature 85
Deactivation 72
Display message 249
Locking 72
Start function 73
Starting the engine 127
Unlocking 72
Kickdown
Driving tips 135
Manual gearshifting 138
Knee bag 45
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
295 Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating 215
Display message 240
Function/information 193
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lap time (RACETIMER) 218Lumbar support
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Adjusting (on the seat) 95
anchors 57 Luxury head restraints 94
Level control
AIRMATIC 171
Level control (display message) ..... 238
License plate lamp (display message) 233 M+S tires Malfunction message
Light function, active see Display Messages Matte finish (cleaning instruc- display message .... 233 Light sensor (display message) .... 301
Light sensor (display message) ..... 255 mbrace
Lights
Activating/deactivating the Intel- ligent Light System 216
Active light function 106
Adaptive Highbeam Assist 107
Automatic headlamp mode 104
Fog lamps (extended) 107
Hazard warning lamps 106
High beam flasher 105
High-beam headlamps 105
Highway mode 107
Light switch 104
Low-beam headlamps 105
Parking lamps 105
Rear fog lamp 105
Standing lamps 105
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) 216
Turn signals 105
see Interior lighting
Loading guidelines 270
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic 78
Emergency locking 78
From inside (central locking button) 7 7
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-board computer) 2 16
Low-beam headlamps
Display message 233
Switching on/off 105
M
M+S tires 323
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 301
mbrace
Call priority 2 86
Display message 227
Downloading destinations (COMAND) 286
Downloading routes 289
Emergency call 283
General notes 283
Geo fencing 289
Locating a stolen vehicle 2 88
MB info call button 285
Remote fault diagnosis 288
Remote vehicle locking 287
Roadside Assistance button 284
Search & Send 286
Self-test 283
Speed alert 289
System 283
Triggering the vehicle alarm 289
Vehicle remote unlocking 287
Mechanical key
Function/notes 73
General notes 73
Inserting 73
Locking vehicle 78
Removing 73
Unlocking the driver's door 78
Media Interface
USB port in the armrest of the center console 271 see Digital Operator's Manual
Memory card (audio) 212
Memory function 102
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
360°camera 185
Active Blind Spot Assist 194
Active Lane Keeping Assist 197
ATTENTION ASSIST 189
Blind Spot Assist 191
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 159
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Steering Pilot 165
General notes 157
Lane Keeping Assist 193
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 174
Parking Pilot 177
PRE-SAFE ^® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) 54
Rear view camera 181
Traffic Sign Assist 190
Message memory (on-board computer) 221
Mirror
Vanity mirror (sun visor) 279
Mirror turn signal
Cleaning 302
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
face) 266
Connecting another mobile
phone 268
Frequencies 350
Installation 3 50
Menu (on-board computer) 212
Transmission output (maximum) .... 350
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) 73
MOExtended tires 307
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle 345
Mounting a new wheel 344
Preparing the vehicle 3 41
Raising the vehicle 342
Removing a wheel 343
Securing the vehicle against rolling away 342
MP3
Operation 212
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
see separate operating instructions
Multifunction display
Function/notes 2 08
Permanent display 215
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 207
Overview 34
Multimedia system
see Separate operating instructions
Music files
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) 210
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
see separate operating instructions
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 124
0
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Conditions 47
Faults 50
Operation 47
System self-test 49
Occupant safety
Air bags 4 4
Automatic measures after an accident 54
Children in the vehicle 55
Important safety notes 39
Introduction to the restraint sys-tem 39
Occupant Classification System (OCS) 46
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 40
Pets in the vehicle 60
PRE-SAFE ^® (anticipatory occupant protection) 53
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) 54
Restraint system warning lamp ...... 40
Seat belt 40
OCS
Conditions 47
Faults 50
Operation 47
System self-test 49
Odometer 209
Off-road driving
Approach/departure angle 360
Checklist after driving off-road ..... 155
Checklist before driving off-road .... 155
Fording depth 359
General information 154
Important safety notes 153
Maximum gradient climbing ability 360
Traveling uphill 156
Off-road system
4MATIC 168
DSR 168
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu 218
Assistance menu 213
Audio menu 211
Convenience submenu 217
Display messages 220
Displaying a service message ..... 298
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 164
Factory settings submenu 217
Important safety notes 206
Instrument cluster submenu 215
Lighting submenu 216
Menu overview 209
Message memory 221
Navigation menu 210
Operation 207
RACETIMER 218
Settings menu 215
Standard display 209
Telephone menu 212
Trip menu 209
Vehicle submenu 216
Video DVD operation 212
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity 27
Important safety notes 27
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Overview 25
Vehicle equipment 25
Outside temperature display 206
Overhead control panel 37
Override feature
Rear side windows 60
P
Paddle shifters
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Paint code number 351
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 301
Panic alarm 39
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Important safety notes 86
Operating 87
Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof 88
Problem (malfunction) 89
Rain closing feature 88
Reversing feature 87
Parcel shelf 275
Parking
Important safety notes 145
Parking brake 146
Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side 101
Rear view camera 181
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Parking Pilot 177
see 360° camera
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating 176
Driving system 174
Function/notes 174
Important safety notes 174
Problems (malfunctions) 177
Sensor range 174
Towing a trailer 174
Warning display 175
Parking brake
Applying automatically 1 47
Applying or releasing manually ..... 147
Display message 224
Electric parking brake 146
Emergency braking 148
General notes 146
Releasing automatically 147
Warning lamp 258
Parking lamps
Switching on/off 105
Parking Pilot
Display Message 241
Exiting a parking space 180
Function/notes 1 77
Important safety notes 177
Parking 179
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message 231
Indicator lamps 40
Problem (malfunction) 231
Pets in the vehicle 60
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Manual 2 63
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) 304
Power locks 78
Power washers 300
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message 228
Operation 53
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS)
Display message 228
Operation 54
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 70
Immobilizer 70
Protection of the environment
General notes 24
Pulling away
Automatic transmission 128
General notes 128
Hill start assist 128
Trailer 128
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App 1
Rescue card 29
Qualified specialist workshop 28
R
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 218
Radiator cover 295
Radio
Selecting a station 211
see separate operating instructions
Radio mode
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity 27
Rain closing feature (panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 88
Reading lamp 108
Rear bench seat
Folding forwards/back 274
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents 123
Setting the temperature 119
Rear fog lamp
Display message 233
Switching on/off 105
Rear Seat Entertainment System
AUX jacks 269
AUX jacks CD/DVD drive 269
Rear seats
Adjusting 95
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions 303
Display in the multimedia system .. 182
Function/notes 181
Switching on/off 182
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) 121
Switching on/off 121
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) 99
Dipping (automatic) 101
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system)
Important safety notes 357
Refueling
Fuel gauge 33
Important safety notes 139
Refueling process 140 see Fuel
Remote control
Programming (garage door opener) 290
Replacing bulbs
General notes 109
Reporting safety defects 29
Rescue card 29
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message 236
Warning lamp 259
Residual heat (climate control) ..... 121
Restraint system
Display message 229
Introduction 39
Warning lamp 258
Warning lamp (function) 40
Reversing feature
Panorama sliding sunroof 87
Roller sunblind 88
Side windows 83
Tailgate 79
Reversing lamps (display message) 233
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26
Roller sunblind
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 88
Roof carrier 277
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) 305
Roof load (maximum) 358
Route (navigation)
see Route guidance (navigation)
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Route guidance (navigation) 210
\$
Safety
Children in the vehicle 55
see Occupant safety
see Operating safety
SD card
Inserting 268
Inserting/removing 268
Removing 268
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Selecting 212
Search & Send
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt 43
Adjusting the height 42
Cleaning 305
Correct usage 42
Fastening 42
Important safety guidelines 41
Introduction 40
Releasing 43
Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) 217
Warning lamp 250
Warning lamp (function) 43
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) 93
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support 95
Adjusting the head restraint 93
Calling up a stored setting (memory function) 103
Cleaning the cover 305
Correct driver's seat position 91
Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back 273
Important safety notes 91
Overview 91
Seat heating problem 9
Seat ventilation problem 96
Storing settings (memory function) 102
Switching seat heating on/off 95
Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 96
Section
Sliding sunroof 86
Selector lever
Cleaning 304
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ..... 303SmartKey
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid 356
Coolant (engine) 356
DEF special additives 355
Engine oil 355
Fuel 353
Important safety notes 352
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) 357
Washer fluid 357
Setting the air distribution 119
Setting the airflow 119
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) 217
On-board computer 215
SETUP (on-board computer) 218
Side impact air bag 46
Side marker lamp (display message) 233
Side windows
Cleaning 302
Convenience closing feature 84
Convenience opening feature 84
Important safety information 83
Opening/closing 83
Overview 83
Problem (malfunction) 85
Resetting 85
Reversing feature 83
SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Sliding sunroof
see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery 74
Changing the programming 73
Checking the battery 74
Convenience closing feature 85
Convenience opening feature 84
Display message 249
Door central locking/unlocking ..... 71
Important safety notes 71
KEYLESS-GO start function 73
Loss 75
Mechanical key 73
Overview 71
Positions (ignition lock) 125
Problem (malfunction) 75
Starting the engine 127
Smartphone
Starting the engine 127
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Snow chains
Information 323
Sockets
Center console 281
General notes 280
Luggage compartment 281
Rear compartment 281
Sound
Switching on/off 264
Special seat belt retractor 55
Specialist workshop 28
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital 210
In the Instrument cluster 33
Segments 206
Selecting the display unit 215
Standing lamps
Display message 233
Switching on/off 105
Start/Stop button
Removing 126
Starting the engine 127
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) 126
STEER CONTROL 69
Steering
Display message 248
Steering Pilot
Activating/deactivating 214
Display message 243
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) 97
Adjusting (manually) 97
Button overview 34
Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 207
Cleaning 304
Important safety notes 97
Steering wheel heating 98
Storing settings (memory function) 102
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) 98
Switching on/off 98
Steering wheel paddle shifters ..... 136
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) 218
Stowage areas 270
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) 271
Center console 272
Center console (rear) 272
Cup holders 277
Eyeglasses compartment 272
Glove box 271
Important safety information ..... 270
Stowage net 272
Stowage net 272
Summer tires
In winter 323
Sun visor 279
Suspension setting
AMG adaptive sport suspension system 173
Suspension settings
SETUP (on-board computer) 218
SUV
(Sport Utility Vehicle) 27
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off 121
Switching on media mode
Via the device list 268
T
Tachometer 206
Tailgate
Display message 247
Emergency unlocking 82
Important safety notes 78
Limiting the opening angle 82
Opening dimensions 358
Opening/closing (automatically from inside) 81
Opening/closing (automatically from outside) 80
Opening/closing (from outside) ..... 79
Tank content
Fuel gauge 33
Technical data
Capacities 352
Information 350
Tires/wheels 345
Trailer loads 361
Vehicle data 358
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) 213
Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) 267
Connecting a mobile phone (general information) 266
Display message 248
Menu (on-board computer) 212
Number from the phone book ...... 213
Redialing 213
Rejecting/ending a call 213
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Switching between mobile phones 268
Temperature
Coolant (display in the instrument cluster) 207
Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 218
Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 218
Outside temperature 206
Setting (climate control) 119
Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 218
Through-loading feature 273
Time
see separate operating instructions
Timing (RACETIMER) 218
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 328
Checking manually 327
Display message 244
Maximum 327
Not reached (TREFIT) 309
Notes 326
Reached (TIREFIT) 310
Recommended 324
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes 327
Important safety notes 327
Restarting 328
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure electronically 330
Function/notes 328
General notes 328
Important safety notes 329
Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor 331
Restarting 330
Warning lamp 262
Warning message 330
TREFIT kit
Important safety notes 308
Storage location 306
Tire pressure not reached 309
Tire pressure reached 310
Using 308
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) 340
Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) 339
Bar (definition) 339
Changing a wheel 341
Characteristics 338
Checking 321
Curb weight (definition) 339
Definition of terms 338
Direction of rotation 341
Display message 244
Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) 340
DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) 339
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 338
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) 339
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) 339
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) 339
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) 339
Important safety notes 321
Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ..... 339
Information on driving 321
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) 339
Maximum load on a tire (definition) 340
Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) 339
Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) 340
Maximum tire load 338
Maximum tire load (definition) ..... 340
MOExtended tires 323
Optional equipment weight (definition) 340
PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) 3 40
Replacing 341
Service life 322
Sidewall (definition) 340
Snow chains 323
Speed rating (definition) 339
Storing 3 41
Structure and characteristics (definition) 338
Summer tires in winter 323
Temperature 335
TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) 340
Tire bead (definition) 3 40
Tire pressure (definition) 340
Tire pressures (recommended) ..... 339
Tire size (data) 345
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating 335
Tire tread 322
Tire tread (definition) 340
Total load limit (definition) 340
Traction 334
Traction (definition) 340
Tread wear 334
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar noseweight) (definition) 340
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 334
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) 339
Wear indicator (definition) 340
Wheel and tire combination 345
Wheel rim (definition) 339 see Flat tire
Top Tether 57
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting 318
Important safety notes 316
Towing a trailer
Axle load, permissible 361
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch 304
Coupling up a trailer 202
Decoupling a traile 204
Driving tips 200
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 66
Important safety notes 199
Installing the ball coupling 201
Lights display message 233
Mounting dimensions 361
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 174
Power supply 205
Pulling away with a trailer 128
Removing the ball coupling 205
Trailer loads 361
Towing away
Important safety guidelines 316
Installing the towing eye 317
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ...... 318
Removing the towing eye 317
Transporting the vehicle 318
With both axles on the ground ..... 317
Towing eye 306
Traffic reports
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
Traffic Sign Assist
Display message 239
Function/notes 190
Important safety notes 190
Instrument cluster display 190
Trailer coupling
see Towing a trailer
Trailer loads and drawbar nose-weights 204
Trailer towing
Active Blind Spot Assist 197
Active Lane Keeping Assist 199
Blind Spot Assist 193
Permissible trailer loads and drawbar noseweights 204
Transfer case 139
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display 134
Transporting the vehicle 318
Traveling uphill
Brow of hill 156
Driving downhill 157
Maximum gradient-climbing capa-bility 156
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) 305
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) 209
Trip odometer
Calling up 209
Resetting (on-board computer) ..... 210
Trunk
see Tailgate
Trunk load (maximum) 358
Turn signals
Display message 233
Switching on/off 105
Two-way radio
Frequencies 350
Installation 350
Transmission output (maximum) .... 350
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-
nition) 340
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking 78
From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) 77
Upshift indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 218
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Interface 2 68
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ...... 279
Vehicle
Correct use 28
Data acquisition 29
Display message 246
Equipment 25
Individual settings 215
Limited Warranty 2 9
Loading 331
Locking (in an emergency) 78
Locking (SmartKey) 71
Lowering 345
Maintenance 26
Operating safety 27
Parking 145
Parking for a long period 148
Pulling away 128
Raising 342
Reporting problems 28
Securing from rolling away 342
Towing away 316
Transporting 318
Unlocking (in an emergency) 78
Unlocking (SmartKey) 71
Vehicle data 358
Vehicle data
Roof load (maximum) 358
Trunk load (maximum) 358
Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Approach/departure angle 360
Fording depth 359
Maximum gradient climbing ability 360
Vehicle dimensions 358
Vehicle emergency locking 78
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate 351
Vehicle level
AIRMATIC 171
Vehicle level (display message) ..... 238
Vehicle tool kit 306
Video
Operating the DVD 212
see also Digital Operator's Manual 263
VIN 351
Seat 352
Type plate 351
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS 253
Brakes 252
Check Engine 259
Coolant 259
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 261
Distance warning 261
ESP ^® 255
ESP ^® OFF 256
Fuel tank 259
Overview 33
Parking brake 258
PASSENGER AIR BAG 4
Reserve fuel 259
Restraint system 258
Seat belt 250
Tire pressure monitor 262
Warranty 25
Washer fluid
Display message 248
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Manual ....
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires 345
Wheel bolt tightening torque 34
Wheel chock 342
Wheels
Changing a wheel 341
Checking 321
Cleaning 301
Emergency spare wheel 346
Important safety notes 321
Information on driving 321
Interchanging/changing 341
Mounting a new wheel 344
Mounting a wheel 341
Overview 321
Removing a wheel 343
Snow chains 323
Storing 3 41
Tightening torque 345
Wheel size/tire size 345
Window curtain air bag
Display message 230
Operation 46
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting 120
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid 297
Important safety notes 357
Windshield wpers
Problem (malfunction) 112
Replacing the wiper blades 110
Switching on/off 109
Winter driving
0 Slippery road surfaces 153
Winter operation
Overview 323
Radiator cover 295
Winter tires
M+S tires 323
Wiper blades
Cleaning 302
Replacing 110
Replacing (windshield) 110
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 305
5Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off 120
Protecting the environment
General notes
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors:
- operating conditions of your vehicle
- your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
- avoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption.
- always make sure that the tire pressures are correct.
- do not carry any unnecessary weight.
- remove roof racks once you no longer need them.
- a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals.
- always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
- do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
- do not warm up the engine when the vehi is stationary.
- drive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.
-
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
-
change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
- switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
- keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Environmental concerns and recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:
- doors
- door pillars
- door sills
- seats
- cockpit
- instrument cluster
- center console
Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only gen ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qu ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories th have been specifically approved for your vehi- cle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (page 351).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all the sys in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book let are important documents and should be k in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions:
- New Vehicle Limited Warranty
- Emission System Warranty
- Emission Performance Warranty
- California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
- State warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized els Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in California
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-tahns number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you change of address or change of ownership
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, In the event of a change of address, please send LLC in writing of the need for its repair. us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the of a less serious nature than category (1) Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center has been subject to repair four or more (USA) at the hotline number
times and you have directly notified 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for Customer Service Center (Canada) at
repair. 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantially. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Nature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner.
Please send your written notice to:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet ^1 with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA)
1-800-387-0100(Canada)
For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty Booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle cment wallet.
Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points:
- Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available.
- Lead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
- The fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Sports Utility Vehicle
WARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event (an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident
Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
• the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road
- you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road
- a heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
These devices may not cause harmful interfer-mation being reset, for example. This may lead ence, and 2) These devices must accept any to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of interference received, including interference the next emissions test during the main inspec-that may cause undesired operation. Changes tion.
or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats or top of one another.
! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring info
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
• work relevant to safety
or• service and maintenance work
- repair work
• alterations, installation work and modifications
• work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:
• the safety notes in this manual
• the vehicle technical data
•traffic rules and regulations
- laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with the Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act 1966.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Ber USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHT cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asperal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data storage
A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about:
• the vehicle's operating state
• incidents
• malfunctions
A general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
- operating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels
- the vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position
- malfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes
- vehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems
• ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature as
This data is of an exclusively technical natureManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions and can be used to:
- assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects
- analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident
- optimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data men and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
- repair services
- service processes
- warranties
- quality assurance
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
The vehicle is read out by employees of the seHow various systems in your vehicle were vice network (including the manufacturer) using operating
special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required.
After a malfunction has been rectified, the inforHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the mation is deleted from the malfunction memory accelerator and/or brake pedal and
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person.
Examples include:
- accident reports
- damage to the vehicle
- witness statements
- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened
or How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the y accelerator and/or brake pedal and
- How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data rou-
Further additional functions that have been cotinely acquired during a crash investigation.
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforce-
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system.
For additional information please refer to the M COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Cockpit
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered diagnostic labels pointing to dashboard and steering wheel| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Steering wheel paddle shift-ers | 136 |
| 2 | Combination switch 105 | |
| 3 | Instrument cluster 33 | |
| 4 | Horn | |
| 5 | DIRECT SELECT lever 132 | |
| 6 | Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display | 175 |
| 7 | Overhead control panel 37 | |
| 8 | Climate control systems 113 | |
| 9 | Ignition lock 125Start/Stop button 125 |
| Function Page | ||
| 10 | Adjusts the steering wheel manually | 97 |
| 11 | Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 98 | 97 |
| 12 | Cruise control lever 158 | |
| 13 | Opens the hood 294 | |
| 14 | Diagnostics connection 28 | |
| 15 | Electric parking brake 146 | |
| 16 | Light switch 104 |
Instrument cluster
text_image
1 2 3 4 62°F 11:30 123.0 26753 7 6 5 N P: D S P4-13-18-19-31| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Speedometer with segments 206Warning and indicator lamps:OFF ESP® OFF 255ABS 253Braking 252BRAKE (USA only)(I) (Canada only)Low-beam headlamps 105Parking lamps 105ESP® High-beam headlamps 105Electric parking brake (red) 258PARK (USA only)(P) (Canada only)(P) Electric parking brake(yellow) 258Distance warning 261 | |
| 2 | Turn signals 105 | |
| 3 | Multifunction display 208 |
i Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found under "Outside temperature display" (▷ page 206).
| Function Page | ||
| 4 | Tachometer 206Warning and indicator lamps:0$ Rear fog lamp 105Check Engine 259Tire pressure monitor 262Restraint system 40Seat belts 250Diesel engine: preglow 127 | |
| 5 | Coolant temperature gauge 207Warning and indicator lamps:Coolant 259 | |
| 6 | Fuel level indicatorWarning and indicator lamps:Reserve fuel with fuelfiller flap location indicator(right-hand side) 259 | |
| 7 | Instrument cluster lighting 206 |
Multifunction steering wheel
text_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered annotations pointing to key components such as steering wheel, speedometer, and air condition meter.Function Page
① Multifunction display 208
② Multimedia system display
③
Switches on voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System
Mute
Adjusts the volume
Rejects or ends a call 212
Exits phone book/redial memory
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem- ory
Function Page
④
Selects a menu 207
Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 207
Confirms a selection 207
Hides display messages 220
Back 207
Switches off voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System
i In vehicles with multimedia system COMAND you can find further information:
• on the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual
• on the DVD changer or single DVD drive the Digital Operator's Manual
- on the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions
i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 you can find further information:
• on the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual
in • on the voice-operated control of the navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions
Center console
Center console, upper section
text_image
Car dashboard control panel with numbered labels pointing to function buttons and status indicators| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions) | |
| 2 | 95 | |
| 3 | 96 | |
| 4 | 174 | |
| 5 | 129 |
| Function Page | ||
| 6 | Hazard warning lamps | 106 |
| 7 | PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lampATA indicator lamp 70 | 40 |
| 8 | ESP^® | 64 |
Center console, lower section
text_image
Diagram of car interior with numbered labels pointing to various components like airbags, screens, and a door.| Function Page | ||
| 10 | Stowage compartment 272 Cup holder 277 Ashtray 279 Cigarette lighter 280 Socket 280 | |
| 11 | DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) | 168 |
| 12 | Manual gearshifting (permanent setting) | 136 |
| 13 | DYNAMIC SELECT controller | 132 |
| 14 | Stowage compartment with Media Interface | 271 |
| 15 | Touchpad (see the separate operating instructions) |
| Function Page | ||
| 16 | Back button (see the separate operating instructions) | |
| 17 | Switches to the favorites button (see the separate operating instructions) | |
| 18 | Switches to the display of the vehicle settings; see the separate operating instructionsMercedes-AMG GLE 63Coupé: AMG adaptive sport suspension system | 173 |
| 19 | Level control (vehicles with AIRMATIC package) | 169 |
Overhead control panel
text_image
Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to various parts, including a close-up inset showing a key.| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off | 108 |
| 2 | Switches the front interior lighting on | 108 |
| 3 | Switches the rear interior lighting on or off | 108 |
| 4 | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off | 109 |
| 5 | Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off | 108 |
| 6 | Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and roller sun-blinds | 87 |
1 LINGUATRONIC is only available in combination with COMAND. Please observe the separate operating instructions.
| Function Page | ||
| 7 | Eyeglasses compartment 272 | |
| 8 | MB Info call button (mbrace system) | 285 |
| 9 | Rear-view mirror 99 | |
| 10 | Buttons for the garage door opener | 292 |
| 11 | Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) | 284 |
| 12 | SOS SOS button (mbrace system) | 283 |
| 13 | Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and LINGUA-TRONIC ^1 | |
Door control panel
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with numbered component labels pointing to key parts.| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Opens the door 77 | |
| 2 | Unlocks/locksthe vehicle | 77 |
| 3 | M 1 2 3Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering column (memory function) | 102 |
| 4 | Adjusts the seats 91 | |
| 5 |  Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors out/in electrically | 99 |
| Function Page | ||
| 6 | Opens/closes the side windows | 83 |
| 7 | Opens/closes the tail-gate | 81 |
| 8 | Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment | 60 |
Panic alarm
text_image
① P80.00-2217-31▶ To activate: press ☐ PANIC button ① for approximately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed.
▶ To deactivate: press ☐ PANIC button ① again or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position▶(page 91).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed page 44).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (page 51).
For information on children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" page 55).
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the force to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
- seat belt system
- air bags
- child restraint system
- child seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times vehicle occupants:
• have fastened their seat belts correctly (▷ page 42)
- have adjusted their seat and head restraint properly ( page 91).
Important safety notes
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: fall further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.
The restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 🪁️ restraint system warning lamp:
- does not light up after the ignition is switch on
- does not go out after a few seconds with engine running
- lights up again while the engine is running
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning Device or the air bag. This poses an increase risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
text_image
ON PASSENCER AIR SAG OFF 2013PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ① PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ② part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS).
The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag.
- PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident.
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey.
- Children in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" ▷(page 46) and on "Children in the vehicle" ▷(page 55). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat.
- All other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (page 46). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts" (page 40) and "Air bags" (page 44). There you can also find information on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants andming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
- Seat belts
- Emergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the
- Seat belt force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing can incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats, synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident.
! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint system is required by law in:
- all 50 states
• the U.S. territories
• the District of Columbia
• all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all veh occupants should correctly fasten their seat ve belts before starting the journey.
WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause Injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are ting properly.
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back-erest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems.
If a child younger than twelve years old and ehlder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
- always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child
- always observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 55) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions
- be sure to observe the instructions and safety the seat belt is not twisted.
notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" ▶ page 46)
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if:
- they are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
- the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
- the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (▷ page 41).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also, make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that:
- the seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat.
• the seat belt is tight across your body.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt.
- the shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. d The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
- the lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt.
- the seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects.
If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place.
- only one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
- objects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.
Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and for restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (page 270).
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt at page 41) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (page 42).
text_image
① ② ③ P1.40-3549-31Basic illustration
▶ Adjust the seat (▷ page 91). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position.
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out and engage belt tongue ② into belt buckle ①.
The seat belt on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (▷ page 43).
▶ If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the center of the sl der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
▶ To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various positions.
▶ To lower: hold belt outlet release ③ and belt outlet downwards.
▶ Let go of belt outlet release ③ in the des position and make sure that the belt outlet engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" page 55).
Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belt can no longer fulfill their protective function.
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back.
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
- the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and - the ignition is switched on
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer page 217).
Belt warning for the driver and front passenger
The seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the ☐ seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the ☐ seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened for a front door is opened again, the ☐ seat belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt waiting is activated again.
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. different air bag systems function independently from one another page 51).
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of i caused by an air bag due to the high speed which the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
• have fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women
- are sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags
• follow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants.
- Adjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the se is in an almost upright position. The center
the head restraint must support the head at about eye level.
- Move the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
- Only hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
• Always lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. - For this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes:
• Always secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems.
- Child restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats.
- Only secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is 'deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated (▷ page 40).
- Always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (▶ page 46) and on "Children in the vehicle" (▶ page 55) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that:
- there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag.
- there are no objects between the seat, door atand B-pillar.
-
no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks.
-
no accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls.
- no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Drive
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it.
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to function of the sensors being impaired. The bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front air bags
! Do not place heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced.
text_image
ent dows, e in ① ② ects angerSafety
Driver's air bag ① deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ② deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag page 40).
The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if:
- the system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (page 46). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (page 47)
• the restraint system control unit predicts a
Driver's knee bag
text_image
m he on P91.60-4692-31Driver's knee bag ① deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is triggered together with the front air bag.
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat.
Side impact air bags
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Diagram showing two blue arrows pointing to a circular symbol labeled '2' on a gray background, with no readable text or symbols.Front side impact air bags ① and rear side impact air bags ② deploy next to the outer ster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the:
- head
- neck
- arms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact bag is deployed on the side on which the imp occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions:
- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or
- the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.
Window curtain air bags
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing dashboard and seat compartments with blue directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)Window curtain air bags ① are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (page 51).
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
• the side impact air bag
• the window curtain air bag
• the Emergency Tensioning Devices
In the following situation, the side impact air Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) and the Emergency Tensioning Device are dea
- OCS has not categorized the person on the front-passenger seat as an adult or a person of corresponding stature and
- the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is not inserted into the front-passenger seat belt buckle
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit:
• with the seat belt fastened correctly
- in an almost upright position with their bac against the seat backrest
- with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger:
• transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest
- sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushion. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion (the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie a flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functionally correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
text_image
ON PASSENCER AIR BAG OFF 240 ① ②Safety
① PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
② PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled.
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
ed The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag.
g. PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy as in the event of an accident.
from PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
\$ the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (▶ page 231). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey.
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:
- the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat
- the front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible.
• the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct.
WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, the child could, in the event of an accident:
- come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example - be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
WARNING
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This post an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (▶ page 50).
If OCS determines that:
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
- the front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard y. child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
- the front-passenger seat is occupied by a pSystem self-test
son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit aft the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes o
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger sea as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat.
- the front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag activated.
DANGER
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggered
seintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occuant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be surecitalist workshop.
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 55).
When the occupant classification system (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 📁 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in \$hiase and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:
- the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat
nt-the person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt
• the front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must for more information about the OCS, see "Prob- always rest on the seat cushion of the frontlems with the Occupant Classification System" passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-(▶ page 50).
facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (page 47). If the front-passenger-front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (▷ page 49).
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit even though the front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature corresponding to that of an adult. | The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorrect.▶ Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person on the front-passenger seat are metpage 47).▶ If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.▶ Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. |
| The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on.The front-passenger seat is:• unoccupied• occupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system | OCS is malfunctioning.▶ Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat.▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.▶ When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.▶ Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly.▶ Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat.▶ If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.▶ Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. |
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag h been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags Emergency Tensioning Device can only be continue to perform their protective function for giggered, if: the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. The ignition is switched on
WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at all qualified specialist workshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardo situations. This procedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bar and a small amount of powder may also be released. The restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your h ing. The powder that is released generally do not constitute a health hazard, but it may ca short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the veh
immediately or open the window in order to vent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the restra system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as:
- duration
- direction
- intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision.
• the ignition is switched on
- the components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (▷ page 40)
- the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the alock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations:
- Front air bags and driver's knee bag g, Window curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt
The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps>(page 40).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in inature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by:
• the distribution of forces during the collision
- the collision angle
• the deformation characteristics of the vehicle
- the characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor they provide an indication of air bag deployment.
How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-eration and the apparent type of accident: out an air bag being deployed. This is the case. if Frontal collision
only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
- Side impact
• Rollover
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result.
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system)
If the restraint system control unit detects a impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the application
Introduction
components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
- Side impact air bags on the side where the impact takes place, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer seats in the second row
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions:
- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or
-
the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
-
Window curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
- Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation
- Window curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other.
Important safety notes
Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE ^® , the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
- in emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated
- in critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely
-
on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: -
the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
- if the vehicle skids, the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.
- vehicles with the memory function: the fronFunction
passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position.
- vehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest is increased.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:
If the hazardous situation passes without resuing in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
▶ Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.
- if the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
- if the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:
- the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary.
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" page 43).
The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled:
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or collision is imminent. In certain hazardous uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFEPLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up.
When driving, or when parking or exiting a pa ing space with assistance from Parking Pilot,
PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes.
- if the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged
- if the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected
- if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates an intention to pull away
If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored.
Automatic measures after an accident
sit-Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact:
• the hazard warning lamps are activated
• the emergency lighting is activated
• the vehicle doors are unlocked
- the front side windows are lowered
vehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised
the engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off
vehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secu in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in vehicle:
- always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child
- be sure to observe the instructions and notes in this section in addition to the ch restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions
- be sure to observe the instructions and safe notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (page 46)
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. New leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with red you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (▷ page 41) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (▷ page 42).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat.
Special seat belt retractor
WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
▶ Always comply with the child restraint system always resting completely on the seat cush manufacturer's installation instructions. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outer behind the child restraint system. Only use let.
child restraint systems with the original cover
▶ Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle designed for them. Only replace damaged Activating the special seat belt retractor: covers with genuine covers.
for behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original cover
I designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
▶ Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat be retractor is activated.
▶ Push the child seat restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loose
Removing a child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
▶ Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
▶ Press the release button of the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back towards the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (page 270).
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint syste is required by law in:
- all 50 states
• the U.S. territories
• the District of Columbia
• all Canadian provinces
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the center rear seat, the rear arm must be folded back as far as possible.
You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even restal.
Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-before you install a child restraint system rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asagain.
intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking of sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restr system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
The securing systems of child restraint systems are:
• the seat belt system
the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
• the Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onseat does not get trapped. The seat belt could the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the otherwise be damaged.
information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" ▷ page 46). There you will also find information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the following standards:
• U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
• Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.▶ Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint This confirmation can also be found in the insta system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing lation instructions that are included with the rings ①.
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
natural_image
Interior view of a car with a highlighted door panel and numbered annotation (no readable text or symbols)Safety
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for especially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lb (22 kg) who are secured using the safety be integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle
in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position.
Make sure that the backrest in the rear compartment engages fully. To do so, pull firmly on the seat backrest.
Top Tether anchorages
text_image
Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and labeled areas, likely for navigation or vehicle tracking.Top Tether anchorage points ④ are located the rear side of the rear seat backrests.
text_image
6 5 4 PF1.20-2363.31▶ Move head restraint ③ up (▷ page 94).
▶ Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
▶ Route Top Tether belt ⑥ under head restraint ③ between the two head restraint bars. Re
▶ Guide Top Tether belt ⑥ downwards between cargo compartment cover ① and rear seat backrest ②.
▶ Hook Top Tether hook ⑤ of Top Tether be ⑥ into Top Tether anchorage ④.
Make sure that:
- Top Tether hook ⑤ is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ④ as shown.
- Top Tether belt ⑥ is not twisted.
- Top Tether belt ⑥ is routed between rear seat backrest ② and cargo compartment cover ① if cargo compartment cover ① is installed.
- Top Tether belt ⑥ is routed between rear seat backrest ② and the cargo net if the cargo net is installed.
▶ Tension Top Tether belt ⑥. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
▶ If necessary, move head restraint ③ back down again slightly. Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ⑥.
Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (▶ page 46).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of:
- an incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seat
- the unintentional deactivation of the front- nt passenger front air bag
the unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (▷ page 40) is the front passenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
• the rear doors (▷ page 60)
- the rear side windows (▷ page 60)
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch in addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed
forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt out let and the front-passenger seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could:
- open doors, thus endangering other people or road users
- exit the vehicle and be caught by oncomir traffic
- operate vehicle equipment and become trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
text_image
Diagram showing car exterior with directional arrows and numbered labels (①, ②) highlighting vehicle componentsPets in the vehicle
WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
- activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
- activate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users
You secure each door individually with the child. Unsecured animals could also be flung around proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, then steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, then the door can be opened from the outside.
▶ To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow ①.
▶ Make sure that the child-proof locks are wo ing properly.
▶ To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ②.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box.
Override feature for the rear side with dows
text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and a magnified view highlighting two numbered items, likely indicating inspection or status.▶ To activate/deactivate: press button ②. If indicator lamp ① is lit, operation of the side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ① is off, operation possible using the switches in the rear compartment.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems:
• ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (▷ page 61)
• BAS (Brake Assist System) (▷ page 61)
• Active Brake Assist (▷ page 62)
- ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (▷ page 64)
• EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (▷ page 66)
• ADAPTIVE BRAKE (▷ page 67)
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (▷ page 67)
• STEER CONTROL (▷ page 69)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, responsible for maintaining the distance to the including driving safety systems, will also vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking become inoperative. Observe the information good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt the ABS warning lamp page 253) and dis- your driving style to suit the prevailing road play messages which may be shown in the weather conditions and maintain a safe distance instrument cluster (page 222). from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only worBraking
as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tire section (▶ page 321).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains
Only in this way will the driving safety system described in this section work as effectively as possible.
- If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.
"To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.
ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle which braking.
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (> page 60).
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
that BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section ( page 60).
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Braking
- Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Active Brake Assist
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▶ page 60).
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist.
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in front or reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you are the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist system supports you.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can impaired if:
- there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
• there is snow or heavy rain
• there is interference by other radar sources - there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
- a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
- a vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
- new vehicles or after servicing is carried on the Active Brake Assist system
Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in ( page 124).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is automatically active after switching on the ignition.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 214) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the assistance graphic display.
If DSR (page 168) is activated, Active Brake Assist is deactivated.
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (page 60).
WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
- when cornering
Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function may:
- give an unnecessary warning
- not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function.
Function
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
▶ Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.
or
▶ Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an ended period of time.
Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h) distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous braking function.
Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONI
the autonomous braking function is available the following speed ranges:
• 4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects
- 4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects
Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges:
- 4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving objects
- 4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE are activated simultaneously>(page 53).
Adaptive Brake Assist
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (> page 60).
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation.
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles.
If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously ( page 53).
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
- you release the brake pedal.
• there is no longer any danger of a collision. - no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (page 60).
- ⚠️ WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
• intervene unnecessarily
- not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sitexample if the road surface is slippery on one uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-intervention in a non-critical driving situation. red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
4ETS traction control is part of ESP
Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for texample if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP ^® .
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
- when cornering
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section ( page 60).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. If the warning lamp and the OFF warning power transmission between the tires and the lamp are lit continuously, ESPs not available road surface. due to a malfunction.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more page 255 and display messages which may wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle page 222.
cle on the desired course within physical limit ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This _QT increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have E\$ checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on a brake test dynamometer. Switch off the ignition.
Application of the brakes by ESR may otherwise destroy the brake system.
A function or performance test should only be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.
! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the front or rear axle raised.
ESP® is only deactivated if the OFF warning lamp is lit continuously.
If the warning lamp and the OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, ESPs not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps (page 255) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (page 222).
Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESPunction properly.
Characteristics of ESP
General information
If the ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP is automatically active.
If ESP® intervenes, the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
▶ Do not deactivate ESPunder any circumstances.
▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ^® ESP remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if ESP ^® was deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off.
Deactivating/activating ESP
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section ( page 60).
You can select between the following states of ESP®:
- ESP® is activated.
- ESP® is deactivated.
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESPin the situations described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate®EBP the following situations:
- when using snow chains
- in deep snow
• on sand or gravel
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip.
i Activate ESP ^ as soon as the situations re described above no longer apply. ESWill otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESPdeactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
text_image
Control panel interface with Chinese labels and an icon of a car recycling symbol, highlighting the step 1.ESP® OFF button (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
text_image
Close-up of a computer interface with a magnified view showing a button labeled '1' pointing to a device.ESP® OFF button (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
▶ To deactivate: press button ①.
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
▶ To activate: press button ①.
The ☐ ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESRs deactivated
If ESP ^ is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP.
- ESP® no longer improves driving stability.
- Engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin.
- Traction control is still activated.
• Active Brake Assist is no longer available; is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP - PRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESRver-venes.
- Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from® ESI
- ESP® still provides support when you brake firmly.
ESP ^® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction.
Crosswind Assist
General information
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated in ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments.
ESP® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle.
DESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.
ESP® trailer stabilization
General information
ESP ^® trailer stabilization is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP can detect this. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly.
Trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 37 mph (60 km/h).
Important safety notes
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP switched off or deactivated because of a malfunction.
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.
important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (page 60).
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps ▷(page 253) as well as display messages ▷(page 224).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function▶(page 167) and hill start assist (▶ page 128).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
General information
i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (▷ page 60).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically and, if necessary, your brake application will be assisted according to the situation. If you do not react, the system can also react by braking automatically. In the event of a detected risk of collision due to crossing traffic you will also be visually and acoustically war as well as assisted by the brake boosting effect according to the situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package.
For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to assist you when driving, the radar system and the camera system must be operational.
If the radar sensor system or the camera sy is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is rested or no longer available. The brake system is still available complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
The radar sensor system and camera system help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as body contours and the posture of a person standing upright.
i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
to
Important safety notes
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.
In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure.
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function might:
- issue an unnecessary warning or engage - neither give a warning nor intervene - There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic tem situation and be prepared to brake, especially if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func- tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify people, particularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be prepared to brake, especially
if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function alerts you.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function does not react:
• to small people, e.g. children
- to animals
• to oncoming vehicles
- when cornering
As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function may not warn you or engage all critical situations. There is a risk of an adent.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if:
- there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
- there is interference by other radar sources Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
- there are strong radar reflections, for exam-deactivated.
If you have activated DSIR (page 168), the ^3 Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated.
ple in parking garages
- a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. motorbike
- a vehicle is traveling in front on a different relative to the center of your vehicle
- vehicles quickly move into the radar sensor system detection range
Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of:
- dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
-
glare on the camera system, e.g. from the cam also brake the vehicle automatically under being low in the sky the following conditions:
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: -
darkness
• or if:
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle
the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
- the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the, vehic have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function
▶ To activate or deactivate: activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function using the on-board computer (▷ page 214).
If the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the multifunction display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone
twilhethen sound and the △ distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
▶ Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or
▶ Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.
- the driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and
• the vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross function may react to:
- stationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
• pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
If there is an increased risk of a collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (▷ page 53).
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function assists you with braking in hazardous situations with:
- stationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
- stationary pedestrians in the path of the vehicle
- obstacles crossing your path that move in the detection range of the sensors and are detec-
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front ted
remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automat emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or during autonomous braking, braking assistance is provided according to the situation. If necessary, this increases the brake pressure up to full brake application.
To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function calculates the brake force necessary if:
- you approach an obstacle, and
-
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function has detected a risk of a collision
-
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over.
- ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
- You can prevent the intervent of Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by:
it-depressing the accelerator pedal further
- activating kickdown
• releasing the brake pedal
The braking application of Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is ended automatically if:
- you maneuver to avoid the obstacle
- there is no longer a risk of collision
• there is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle
When driving at a speed
under20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is activated. The increase in brake pressure from Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is carried out at the last poss moment.
When driving at a speed
above20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).
STEER CONTROL
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in particular if:
- both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake
• the vehicle starts to skid
important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (> page 60).
No steering assistance is provided from STEER CONTROL, if:
- ESP® is deactivated
- ESP® is malfunctioning
• the steering is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering.
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp ① flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
▶ To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open:
- a door
• the vehicle with the mechanical key
the tailgate - the hood
To switch the alarm off with the Smart-
Key: press the 📊 or 🔍 button on the SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
▶ To activate with the SmartKey: remove SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.
▶ To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyor
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has left inside the vehicle.
▶ Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
be insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
text_image
1 ON PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIf the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that:
- you have subscribed to the mbrace service.
- the mbrace service has been activated properly.
- the necessary mobile phone network is available.
SmartKey
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
- get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before following components: inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. • the doors
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey.
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal for
- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO Start function key in the temperature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO Start function key will not be detected.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button.
SmartKey functions
text_image
Diagram of a car's internal components with numbered labels pointing to different parts.P80.35-2451-31
① Locks the vehicle
② ☐ Opens/closes the tailgate
③ Unlocks the vehicle
▶ To unlock centrally: press the 📊 button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
- the vehicle is locked again.
• anti-theft protection is reactivated.
▶ To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the following components:
- the doors
- the tailgate
^3- the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (page 216).
You will receive visual and acoustic locking confirmation if all components were able to be locked.
If activated in the multimedia system, the locator lighting also lights up in the dark (see separate operating instructions).
▶ To open the tailgate automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold the button until the tailgate opens.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ To close the tailgate automatically from outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press the 📋 button on the SmartKey. When the tailgate closes you can then release the button.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KE LESS-GO key in the vehicle page 127).
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the dle is used, must both be closed. The Smartk must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:
R when starting the engine
R while driving
R when the external door handles are touched
R during convenience closing
text_image
a- pa- n 3 1 2 m oca- ,To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
▶ To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface ① or ②.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle.
▶ Convenience closing feature: touch by recessed sensor surface ② for an extended Y-period.
Further information on the convenience closing feature ( page 84).
If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only the cargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked.
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby.
▶ To deactivate: press the 🔒 button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, KEY-LESS-GO is deactivated▷(page 74).
▶ To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. d KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again.
KEYLESS-GO start function
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle page 127).
Changing the settings of the lockin system
You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently alone.
▶ To change the setting: press and hold down the 📊 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously Re for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice page 74).
If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the 🔒 or ⬇ button:
- locks or
- unlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
▶ To unlock: press the 📊 button once.
▶ To unlock centrally: press the 📊 button twice.
▶ To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:
▶ To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.
▶ To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.
▶ To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles (▷ page 72).
▶ To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the ⏻ and ⏻ buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (▷ page 74).
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 70).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.
▶ To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
text_image
1 2 P80.20-3612-31▶ Push release catch ① in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ② from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
- unlocking the driver's door (▷ page 78)
- unlocking the cargo compartment (▷ page 82)
- locking the vehicle (▷ page 78)
Inserting the mechanical key
▶ Push mechanical key ② completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch ① is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Checking the battery
text_image
in tal If n 1 P80:35-2454-31▶ Press the 🔊 or 🔍 button.
The battery is working properly if battery check lamp ① lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check lamp ① does not light up briefly.
▶ Change the battery (▷ page 74).
If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the 🔊 or ⬇ button:
- locks or
- unlocks the vehicle
You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 73).
text_image
e- l- e k- ① ② P80.35-2455-31▶ Press mechanical key ② into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover ① opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover ① closed while doing so.
▶ Remove battery compartment cover ①.
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical device with a numbered component (3) and part of a lid, shown in two views (no text or symbols on the device itself)▶ Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery ③ falls out.
▶ Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
▶ Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
▶ Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover ① into the housing first and then press to close it.
▶ Insert mechanical key ② into the SmartKey (▷ page 73).
▶ Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.
Problems with the SmartKey
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| You can no longer lock unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. | The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.▶ Check the SmartKey battery (▷ page 74) and replace it if necessary (▷ page 74).If this does not work:▶ Unlock (▷ page 78) or lock (▷ page 78) the vehicle using the mechanical key. |
| There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.▶ Unlock (▷ page 78) or lock (▷ page 78) the vehicle using the mechanical key. | |
| The SmartKey is faulty.▶ Unlock (▷ page 78) or lock (▷ page 78) the vehicle using the mechanical key.▶ Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| You can no longer lock unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. | KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.▶ Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (▷ page 72). |
| The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.▶ Check the SmartKey battery (▷ page 74) and replace it if necessary (▷ page 74).If this does not work:▶ Unlock (▷ page 78) or lock (▷ page 78) the vehicle using the mechanical key. | |
| There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.► Unlock (▷ page 78) or lock (▷ page 78) the vehicle using the mechanical key. | |
| KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.► Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey.► Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function:► Unlock (▷ page 78) or lock (▷ page 78) the vehicle using the mechanical key.► Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The engine cannot be started using the Smart-Key. | The on-board voltage is too low.► Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:► Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (▷ page 313).or► Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 313).or► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine cannot be started using the Start/Stop button. The Smart-Key is in the vehicle. | The vehicle is locked.► Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. |
| The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.► Check the SmartKey battery (▷ page 74) and replace it if necessary (▷ page 74).If this does not work:► Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. | |
| There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.► Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. | |
| You have lost a Smart-Key. | ► Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.► Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.► If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
| You have lost the mechanical key. | ► Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.► If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
Doors
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the ve they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (▷ page 60).
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm ▷ page 70).
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and keyway (no visible text or symbols)▶ Front door: pull door handle ②.
If the door is locked, locking knob ① pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
▶ Rear door: pull door handle ②.
If the door is locked, locking knob ① pops up
le, and the door unlocks.
▶ Pull door handle ② again.
The door can be opened.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
^in You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. The buttons are located on both front doors.
text_image
Car interior photo with numbered annotation highlighting a lock mechanism, likely for diagnostic or safety instructions.▶ To unlock: press button ①.
▶ To lock: press button ②.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked from the outside.
You can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if:
- the vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or
- if the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
text_image
Car interior control panel with numbered labels pointing to lock icons, highlighting a specific component.▶ To deactivate: press and hold button ① for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
▶ To activate: press and hold button ② for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.
You could therefore be locked out if:
• the vehicle is being pushed.
• the vehicle is being towed.
• the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (▷ page 216).
Power closing
Power closing pulls the doors into their locks automatically even if they are only partly close
▶ To power close a door: push the door into the lock up to the first detent position. Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
Unlocking/locking the driver's door using the mechanical key
If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using the mechanical key, begin by pressing the locking button for the interior locking mechanism while the driver's door is open. Then lock the driver's door using the mechanical key.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side mirror highlighting a blue arrow, with no visible text or symbols on the car surface.▶ Insert the mechanical key as far as it will go into opening ① in the protective cap.
▶ Pull and hold the door handle.
▶ Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.
▶ Release the door handle.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's wheel and dashboard with a magnified inset showing a blue component (no visible text or symbols)▶ To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
▶ To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and ed. open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys- tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 70).
If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
ped. If the tailgate is stopped during the closing procedure, it will open again automatically. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate.
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit veh occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
of to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• over the last 13 in (8 mm) of the closing
clemovement
The reversing feature cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations in particular. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- press the 📋 button on the SmartKey, or
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (▷ page 358).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines ( page 270).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out.
You can:
- close the tailgate manually from outside
- open and close the tailgate automatically from outside
- open and close the tailgate automatically from inside
- limit the opening angle of the tailgate
- unlock the tailgate from inside with the emergency release
pull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or
- press the closing or locking button on the tailgate or
- pull the handle on the tailgate
Opening and closing manually from outside
Opening
natural_image
Side profile of a car showing the front side and internal compartment, with a magnified inset highlighting a component labeled '1' (no text or symbols on the main image)Tailgate reversing feature
▶ Press the 📤 button on the SmartKey.
▶ Press handle for the tailgate ①.
The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacleThe tailgate opens automatically.
detection with reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stop-
Closing
natural_image
Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and internal panel, showing no visible text or symbols▶ Pull the tailgate down using recess ①. You can release the tailgate as soon as the tailgate starts to close.
- Lock the vehicle if necessary with the button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-G0
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
Opening/closing automatically from outside
Important safety notes
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of t closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- press the 📋 button on the SmartKey.
- pull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
- pull the handle on the tailgate
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section ( page 358).
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for the tailgate ( page 79).
Opening the tailgate automatically
You can open the tailgate automatically with the SmartKey or with the handle for the tailgate.
▶ Press and hold the 📋 button on the Smart-Key until the tailgate opens.
or
When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and let it go again immediately.
or
▶ With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate position, pull the tailgate upwards. the You can release the tailgate as soon as the tailgate starts to open.
Closing the tailgate automatically
text_image
1 2 STOP F72 20-3270-31▶ To close: press closing button ① in the tail gate.
or
▶ Press and hold the 📋 button on the Sm Key until the tailgate closes. The SmartKey must be located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
You can release the button as soon as the tailgate starts to close.
or
▶ Pull the tailgate downwards slightly.
You can release the tailgate as soon as the tailgate starts to close.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close and lock the tailgate.
▶ Press locking button ② in the tailgate. If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks. All the doors must be shut and the SmartKey locate in the vicinity of the tailgate.
The tailgate cannot be opened and closed with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey ignition.
If the tailgate touches an object while close the closing procedure is interrupted and the tailgate reopens.
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
Opening/closing automatically from inside
Important safety notes
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. In addition, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. children, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.
Release the remote operating switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-part-open the tailgate pull on the remote operating switch.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (▷ page 358).
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for the tailgate (page 79).
Opening and closing
text_image
Car interior control panel with a highlighted device labeled '①' and a digital display showing a logo.▶ To open: pull remote operating switch ① for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
▶ To close: turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition lock.
▶ Press remote operating switch for tailgate until the tailgate is completely closed.
You can open and close the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
Limiting the opening angle of the gate
General notes
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside.
Activating
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 4 in (10 cm) before the stop.
▶ To open the tailgate: pull the handle on tailgate.
▶ To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button
the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again.
▶ To save the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until two short tones sound.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening.
Deactivating
▶ Press and hold the closing button in the tail-gate until you hear a short tone.
Tailgate emergency release or Z
General notes
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (page 358).
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
• using the SmartKey, or
- using the remote operating switch in the door control panel:
Use the emergency release.
Opening
text_image
te. s re the in ① P45 10-6626-31▶ Fold the rear seat backrest forward (▷ page 274).
▶ Take mechanical key ② out of the SmartKey (▷ page 73).
▶ Insert mechanical key ② or a suitable too e.g. a thin screwdriver, into opening ① in paneling and push it in.
The tailgate is released.
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Insert mechanical key ② into the SmartKey (▷ page 73).
Side windows
Important safety notes
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again
jically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small gers
• over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement
- during resetting
- when closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.
in Opening and closing the side win- edows
The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take precedence.
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with labeled compartments and a magnified inset highlighting the first three compartments.Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an auto-④matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automat-
① Front left
② Front right
③ Rear right
④ Rear left
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in ignition lock.
▶ To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch.
▶ To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
▶ To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it.
▶ To close fully: pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started.
▶ To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.
If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated ▷(page 60).
Convenience opening
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving.
To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out following functions simultaneously:
- unlock the vehicle
- open the side windows
- open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind
- switch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat
The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be near the driver's door handle.
The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked.
t Convenience opening
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's door.
Press and hold the button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first.
▶ Press and hold the 📊 button again until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is / in the desired position.
▶ To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:
- close the side windows - close the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblind.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
- Release the button to interrupt the closing procedure.
- Press and hold the button to open.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
b-Release the sensor surfaces on the exterior door handle to interrupt the closing procedure.
To open, pull the same door handle immediately and hold it firmly. The door windows and
the sliding sunroof will open for as long as door handle is held but the door is not opened.
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
- the side window (▷ page 83)
- the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (> page 87)
Using the SmartKey
The SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be near the driver's door handle.
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the of the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's door.
▶ Press and hold the 🔒 button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows and t panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
sidele.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel:
▶ Press and hold the ☐ button again until roller sunblind of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closes.
▶ To interrupt convenience closing: release the 🔒 button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel with a keyhole and number 1, no visible text or symbols▶thouch recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface ①.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panels are closed.
▶ Vehicles with a panorama roof with Fo power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.
To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface ① on the door h.
hResetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it.
▶ Close all the doors.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (page 83).
▶ Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
▶ Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed ( page 83).
▶ Hold the switch for an additional second.
▶ If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
Problems with the side windows
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side win closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releas the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. | Remove the objects. ▶ Close the side window. |
| A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. | If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: ▶ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: ▶ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature. |
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
• during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.
WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion.
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window. The noise will be reduced or eliminated.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-② To open matic reversing feature. If a solid object block③ To close/lower
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you
the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be opened when the roller sunblind is open.
S-Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press or pull the ☐ switch in the corresponding direction.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small gers
• over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing movement
- during resetting
- when closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- press the switch in any direction during automatic closing process
If you press/pull the ☐ switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.
After opening the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior.
At low speeds it raises again automatically. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result.
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic lowering. To do so, press the ☐ switch. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel raises again automatically.
the You can continue to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel after you switch off the engine or remove tSmartKey. This func-
tion remains active for five minutes or until yōbe roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior open a front door. from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama closed when the panorama roof with power tilt/roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be sliding panel is closed.
opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear.
Rain-closing feature
The raised panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel automatically lowers when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on:
- the road speed and
• the intensity of the rain
You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the ☐ switch in an direction.
To raise the panorama roof with power tilt/slicing panel again, press the ☐ switch in direction ①. The rain-closing feature remains activated.
Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Important safety notes
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-blind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
• during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be ped.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblind is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness to the roller sunblind while it is closing.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers
- when closing the roller sunblind again manually immediately after automatic reversal
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep area. If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing the roller sunblind
text_image
Car dashboard interface with numbered UI elements and a highlighted circular diagram showing directional arrows① To open
② To open
③ To close
▶ Press or pull the ☐ switch in the corresponding direction.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in tReset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding ignition lock. panel and the roller sunblind if the panorama
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblind does not move smoothly.
If you press the ☐ switch beyond the point resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. ▶ You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.
After opening the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
Pull the ☐ switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③ until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
- Keep the ☐ switch pulled for an additional second.
▶ Pull the ☐ switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③ until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Keep the ☐ switch pulled for an additional second.
Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind can be fully opened and closed again.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Part of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
The sliding sunroof can- not be closed and you cannot see the cause.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
▶ Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly:
▶ Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Correct driver's seat position
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat be before starting the engine.
text_image
Diagram of a car interior showing driver's seatbelt and steering wheel, with numbered labels pointing to the seat.Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel ①, seat belt ② and driver's seat ③:
- you are as far away from the driver's air b possible.
- you are sitting in a normal upright position.
- your thighs are slightly supported by the se cushion.
- your legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly.
- the back of your head is supported at eye by the center of the head restraint.
- you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
- you can move your legs freely.
- you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.
- you should have a good overview of traffic conditions. - the seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area.
Further related subjects:
• Electrical seat adjustment (▷ page 93)
- Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically (▷ page 97) or electrically (▷ page 97)
- Fastening the seat belt correctly (▷ page 4
- Adjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (> page 99).
Vehicles with memory function: storing the seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and Head-up Display settings with the memory function ( page 102)
Seats
Important safety notes
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
atMake sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (level 44) and "Children in the Vehicle" (page 55).
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information:
- keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.
- if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats.
- clean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care".
- do not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.
- when the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
The head restraints cannot be removed from the front and rear seats.
For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:
- Cargo compartment enlargement (folding down the rear bench seat) page 273)
Adjusting the seats electrically
text_image
Diagram showing car interior with numbered directional arrows and a magnified view of the vehicle's internal structure.① Head restraint height
② Seat cushion angle
③ Seat height
④ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
⑤ Backrest angle
i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-SAFE® has been triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a better tion if it was previously in an unfavorable tion.
i Vehicles with memory function: when the seat is moved forwards or backwards, the headrest is moved up or down automatically.
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat before starting the engine.
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to correct position.
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head.
Observe the important safety notes regarding the seats ▷(page 91).
Adjusting the front head restraints and-aft position
posi- posi-
text_image
posi- posi- y. P91.18-201431With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head.
▶ To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.
There are several notches.
▶ To move backwards: press and hold release button ① and push the head restraint backwards.
▶ When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.
risk
Adjusting the height of the head restraints electrically
▶ To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (▷ page 93) up or down in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
natural_image
Interior view of a car's backrest with blue arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)▶ To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster ① into the desired position.
▶ To adjust the fore/aft position of the H restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ②.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back your head is as close to the head restraint possible.
Rear seat head restraints
Folding the outer head restraints up down
natural_image
Close-up of a car headrest with a numbered connection point (1) on the seat, no visible text or symbols beyond the number.▶ To fold down: press release catch ①. The head restraint moves back down automatically.
▶ To fold upwards: grasp the back of the head restraint and pull upwards.
Adjusting the height of the middle head restraints
natural_image
Diagram showing a valve mechanism with blue directional arrows, including a magnified inset of the valve handle (no text or symbols present)▶ To raise: pull the head restraint up to the ad desired position.
To lower: press release catch ① and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position.
Removing and installing the rear seat head restraints
▶aCenter head restraint only: pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
▶ To remove: press release catch ① and pull the head restraint out of the guides.
▶ To re-install: insert the head restraint so that or the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
▶ Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position.
Adjusting the angle of the rear sea backrests
text_image
Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt and seat movement with numbered annotationsYou can adjust the angle of the backrests in the second row of seats. There are several possible detent positions.
▶ Pull the left or right release lever ② upwards in the direction of the arrow until relevant backrest ① is fully released.
▶ Pull backrest ① forwards in the direction of the arrow and allow it to engage.
▶ To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean firmly against backrest ①.
Adjusting the multicontour seat
The multicontour seat can be adjusted via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions).
You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.
Seat heating and seat ventilation
Switching the seat heating on/off
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.
text_image
ean 1 P54.25-9651Driver's and front-passenger seat
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
text_image
Diagram of a car wheel assembly with numbered parts labeled 1 to 4, showing internal components and a pointer.① Raises the backrest contour
② Softens the backrest contour
③ Lowers the backrest contour
④ Hardens the backrest contour
text_image
Diagram showing a control panel with a hand icon and a numbered label, likely indicating a device or interface.Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in t ignition lock ▷(page 125).
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.
Activating and deactivating seat ventilation
text_image
Car infotainment panel with Chinese labels and a circular icon showing a seatbelt device.The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock ✉ page 125).
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeatedly the until the desired ventilation level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature ( page 84). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.
Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The seat heating or seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. | The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical co- ers are switched on. ▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such a rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or ventilation will switch back on automatically. |
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat before starting the engine.
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
text_image
Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and steering wheel with numbered directional arrows indicating motion paths① Release lever
② Adjusts the steering wheel height
③ Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)
▶ Push release lever ① down completely. The steering column is unlocked.
▶ Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.
▶ Push release lever ① up completely. The steering column is locked.
▶ Check if the steering column is locked. When
ver doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
direction.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
text_image
Diagram showing car dashboard control with numbered directional arrows and a magnified view of the camera mode dial.① Adjusts the steering wheel height
② Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.
i Further related subjects:
- EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 98)
- Storing settings (▷ page 102)
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with labeled components and a magnified inset highlighting three numbered parts.▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow ① or ②.
Indicator lamp ③ lights up or goes out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The steering wheel heat-The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consuming has switched off preers are switched on.
maturely or cannot be switched on.
▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.
Press one of the memory function position buttons. This function is only available on vehicles and out of your vehicle easier.
with memory function.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (▷ page 217).
Position of the steering wheel when EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when you:
- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
- open the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in position 1
- open the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driving
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
text_image
in it riv- ① P68.40-2222-31Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever ① forwards or back.
The steering wheel is moved to the last select position when:
• the driver's door is closed
- you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
or
- you press the Start/Stop button once on ve cles with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position.
The last position of the steering column is sto when you:
- switch the ignition off
- save the setting with the memory function (▷ page 102).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:
readjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is open
This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupar
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 217).
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.
text_image
Diagram showing a device with three labeled buttons (1, 2, 3) and a magnified view of the device's interior space.▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in ignition lock ▷(page 125).
▶ Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press h ton ①.
Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button ②.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding buton lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after so time. You can adjust the selected exterior mirror using button ③ as long as the indi lamp is lit.
▶ Press button ③ up, down, or to the right left until you have adjusted the exterior mi to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger portion of vision.
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically the rear window defroster is switched on and outside temperature is low.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically
natural_image
Interior view of a car with a digital camera icon and directional arrow, no visible text or symbols▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock ▶ page 125).
▶ Briefly press ①.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.
If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.
tResetting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. Otherwise, the exterior mirrors will not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer t(▷ page 217).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition melock (▶ page 125).
▶ Briefly press ①.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (▶ page 217):
- the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
- the exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows:
▶ Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually.
▶ Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button ① until you hear a click and the mirror engages in position audibly.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (▷ page 99).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following:
- Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water.
- Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
- If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
- If electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte.
- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
• the ignition is switched on and
- incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or of interior lighting is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior ror on the front-passenger side
mir-
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
text_image
1 2 3 4 M 1 2 3 P54:25-9608:31① Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
② Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror
③ Adjustment button
④ Memory button M
▶ Bring the vehicle to a standstill.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ Press button ②.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the default setting parking position.
▶ Use button ③ to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.
Using the memory button
You can store the parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory button M ④. The reverse gear must not be engaged during the process.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition r-lock (> page 125).
▶ Press button ②.
▶ Use button ③ to adjust the exterior mirror to position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.
You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position.
▶ Press memory button M ④ and one of the arrows on button ③ within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.
▶ If the mirror moves out of position, repeat steps.
Calling up a stored parking position ting
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the iglock ( page 125).
▶ Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button ②.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sid moves back to its original position:
- as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h)
- if you press button ① for the exterior mirror on the driver's side
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when the attended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never serve children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The memory function can be used at any time, ignition even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition lock.
With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.
The following settings are stored as a single memory preset:
e• position of the seat, backrest and head restraint
- driver's side: steering wheel position
- driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Memory function
Storing settings
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.
text_image
M 1 2 3 P91.10-3820-31▶ Adjust the seat (▷ page 93).
On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel ( page 97) and the exterior mirrors ( page 99).
▶ Press memory button M and then press memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.
The memory function can still be used if the SmartKey has been removed.
Calling up a stored setting
▶ Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position buttons.
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
- the light switch
• the combination switch (▷ page 105) - the on-board computer (▷ page 216)
Light switch
Operation
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 P82.10-7451-311 ←P Left-hand standing lamps
2 P←→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 ☐ Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
⑥ 0‡ Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
▶ Turn the light switch to AUTO.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand running lamps and parking lamps switch on. ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: If the engine is running and you turn the light remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock switch to ☑, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. open the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 in the ignition lock USA only:
Automatic headlamp mode
AUTO is the favored light switch position. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
al• SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on/off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
- With the engine running (USA only): if you have switched on the Daytime Running
Lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
▶ To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to AUTO.
WARNING
When the light switch is set to AUTO, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to .
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to the ≥00≤ position, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to ☐, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility. To switch on: turn the light switch to ≥00≤ . of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the The green ≥00≤ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer ( page 216). Standing lamps
If the engine is running and you turn the light switching on the standing lamps ensures the switch to 200 or 3D , the manual settings corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
take precedence over the daytime running lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is turn the light switch to P ≤slant (left-hand side of dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on the vehicle).
and the light switch is set to the ☐D positive vehicles towing a trailer: both the right-hand This is a particularly useful function in the event and left-hand standing lamps (tail lamps) are of rain and fog. always illuminated on the trailer.
▶ To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to 📋.
The green 📋 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
▶ To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to 📋 or AUTO .
▶ Press the ☐ button.
The yellow 0\$ indicator lamp in the instr ment cluster lights up.
▶ To switch off the rear fog lamp: press, 0# button.
The yellow 0\$ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
! If the battery charge is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the ≥00≤ parking lamps over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand P≤ or left-hand P≤ standing lamps.
text_image
Combination switch U- thick the or ① ② ③ ④① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
⑬ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left
▶to indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.
▶ To indicate: press the combination switch king beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.
To switch on the high-beam headlamps: ell lit turn the light switch to 📋 or AUTO.
▶ Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ①. In the AUTO position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running.
The blue ☐D indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.
▶ To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch back its normal position.
The blue ☐D indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it automatically controls activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps▶(page 107).
Hazard warning lamps
text_image
Control panel interface with warning sign and warning triangle icon, showing status indicators and date 25-96(11-31)▶ To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button ①.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on turn signal using the combination switch, or the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
▶ To switch off the hazard warning lamp press button ①.
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if:
- an air bag is deployed or
- the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automatiswitched on.
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above Active:
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if ignition is switched off.
Intelligent Light System
General notes
The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, highway mode and extended range fog lamps. The system is only active when it is dark.
You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" using the on-board computer (▷ page 216).
Active light function
The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to identify pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active light function evaluates the course of the lane in which you are driving and pre-emptively controls the active light function.
Vehicles with the drive program S+ (Sport Plus): when the drive program is activated, the active light function headlamps swing in and out. This shows that the light setting is in sport mode. The
os: dynamism of the active light function increases.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are
Active:
- if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or return the steering wheel
- if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle Cornering light function with traffic circle function:
The cornering light function is activated on both sides before entering a traffic circle through sides before entering a traffic circle through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians crossing the road, for example, are illuminated crossing the road, for example, are illuminated by your vehicle in good time.
Highway mode
Highway mode increases the range of the beam.
Active: if you are driving at a speed above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are driving at a speed above 130 km/h.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds bel 80 km/h following activation.
Extended range fog lamps
The extended range fog lamps reduce the glan experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the road.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below 40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the fog lamp.
Not active: if, following activation, you are ing at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h) or if you switch off the rear fog lamp
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
- if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel
- if you are driving at speeds between 25 mp (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. driv-
Important safety notes
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users:
• who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
• who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
be whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
- dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
▶ To switch on: turn the light switch to
▶ Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow
The indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road have been detected or the roads are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The D indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The A indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
text_image
Diagram of car interior airway seating with numbered labels pointing to different compartmentsOverhead control panel
Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off
② 📌 Switches the front interior lighting on
③ 🏱 Switches the rear interior lighting on/
off
4 Switches the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off
⑤ Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on/off
⑥ Switches the automatic interior lighting control on
Interior lighting control
users General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
The color and brightness for the ambient lighting
▶ To switch off: move the combination switch may be set via the multimedia system (see the back to its normal position or move the light separate operating instructions).
switch to another position.
The □■ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes ∪t.
Automatic interior lighting control
▶ To switch on: set the switch to center tion ⑥.
▶ To switch off: set the switch to the position.
The interior lighting automatically switches on you:
- unlock the vehicle
- open a door
- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted with the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions.
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically the vehicle is involved in an accident.
▶ To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button.
or
▶ Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LEI headlamps)
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the vehicle's bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified cialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield via wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch the windshield wipers in dry weather.
text_image
pe- work sfty 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Combination switch
1 0 Windshield wiper off
2 ⋯ Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity)
3 .... Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity)
4 — Continuous wipe, slow
5 = Continuous wipe, fast
⑥ Single wipe
⑦ To wipe with washer fluid
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.
In the ⋯ or ⋯ position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the ⋯ position
the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the ·s position, causing the windshield to wipe more frequently.
Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: the washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades when wiping with washer fluid ☐ the was fluid is emitted directly from the blades.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! Always position the windshield wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windshield. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the hood.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade▶ Firmly press release knob ① and pull wiper and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield blade ② upwards from the wiper arm in the may be damaged by the force of the impact.direction of the arrow.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Replacing the wiper blades (standard wiper blades)
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position
tOn, vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ Set the windshield wiper to position — on the combination switch.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (page 125).
As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the
enthood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock (page 125).
▶ Remove the SmartKey.
▶ Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
▶ Set the windshield wiper to the — position.
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts.
▶ When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper stops.
▶ Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place.
Removing the wiper blades
text_image
Diagram showing a car's battery plug with labeled parts and an inset magnified view highlighting the component.▶ Firmly press release knob ① and pull wiper blade ② upwards from the wiper arm in the ct.direction of the arrow.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
Installing the wiper blades
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel with a magnified inset showing a blue arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)▶ Position new wiper blade ① in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the direction of the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
▶ Make sure that the wiper blade is seated rectly.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
Replacing the wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical tion
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ Set the windshield wiper to position — on the combination switch.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 125).
▶ As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to hood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock ▶ page 125).
▶ Remove the SmartKey.
▶ Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
▶ Set the windshield wiper to the — position.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts.
▶ When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper stops.
▶ Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place.
Removing a wiper blade
text_image
Diagram showing car safety instructions with numbered arrows and a gear symbol, likely for vehicle maintenance or safety tracking.▶ To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① beyond the point of resistance.
The wiper blade engages in the removal position with an audible click.
▶ To remove a wiper blade: firmly press release knob ② and pull the wiper blade upwards ③.
Installing the wiper blades
text_image
the ① ② ③ field▶ Push the new wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① onto the wiper arm until lug ② engages.
▶ Push the wiper blade out of the removal position in the direction of arrow ③ beyond the point of resistance.
The wiper blade disengages with an audible click and is freely movable again.
▶ Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
| Problems with the windshield wipers | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The windshield wipers are jammed. | Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.► For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or► Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.► Remove the cause of the obstruction.► Switch the windshield wipers back on. |
| The windshield wipers fail completely. | The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.► Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.► Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
Overview of climate control syste
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
- switch off climate control only briefly
- switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
- switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function
- switch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air.
The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (▷ page 121).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature ( page 84).
This will speed up the cooling process and desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly.
If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (▶ page 127).
The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
i Vehicles with AIR-BALANCE package: in addition to ionization, the vehicle has an air filter with anti-allergenic properties that contribute to improved air filtration.
i It is possible that under certain circumstan rings the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes.
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 MAX MAX COOL A/C WEAR AUTO OFF 10 9 8 7 12 11 P68.10-4717-31USA only
Front control panel
① Sets the temperature, left (▷ page 119)
② Defrosts the windshield (▷ page 120)
③ Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (▷ page 120)
④ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 118)
⑤ Switches the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 121)
⑥ Sets the temperature, right (▷ page 119)
⑦ Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (▷ page 121)
⑧ Sets the air distribution (▷ page 119)
⑨ Increases the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑩ Reduces the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑪ Activates/deactivates climate control (▷ page 117)
⑫ Sets climate control to automatic (▷ page 118)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO MAX ZONE A/C HEAT REAR OFF 10 9 8 7 P83.30-4938-31Canada only
Front control panel
① Sets the temperature, left (▷ page 119)
② Defrosts the windshield (▷ page 120)
③ Switches the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 120)
④ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▶ page 118)
Switches the residual heat on or offpage 121)
⑤ Switches the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 121)
⑥ Sets the temperature, right (▷ page 119)
⑦ Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (▷ page 121)
⑧ Sets the air distribution (▷ page 119)
⑨ Increases the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑩ Reduces the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑪ Activates/deactivates climate control (▷ page 117)
⑫ Sets climate control to automatic (▷ page 118)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 FR3.50-2214-31Rear control panel
① Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic
② Switches the rear climate control on/off
③ Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents
④ Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off
⑤ Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents
⑥ Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO MAX AIR A/C ZONE OFF 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
text_image
16 17 18 19 20 24 23 22 21USA only
Front control panel
① Sets the temperature, left (▷ page 119)
② Defrosts the windshield (▷ page 120)
③ Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (▷ page 120)
④ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 118)
⑤ Switches the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 121)
⑥ Sets the temperature, right (▷ page 119)
⑦ Switches the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 120)
⑧ Activates/deactivates climate control (▷ page 117)
⑨ Sets the air distribution (▷ page 119)
⑩ Increases the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑪ Reduces the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑫ Display
⑬ Adjusts the climate mode settings (▷ page 118)
⑭ Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (▷ page 121)
⑮ Sets climate control to automatic (▷ page 118)
Rear control panel
⑯ Increases the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑰ Sets the temperature (▷ page 119)
⑱ Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (▷ page 118)
⑲ Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (▷ page 119)
⑳ Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (▷ page 95)
②1 Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (▷ page 119)
②2 Switches the rear climate control on/off (▷ page 117)
②3 Reduces the airflow (▷ page 119)
②4 Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (▷ page 95)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO REST A/C FOCUS MEDIUM SURFACE AIR FLAME ZONE OFF 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
text_image
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24P83.40-5013-31
Canada only
Front control panel
① Sets the temperature, left (▷ page 119)
② Defrosts the windshield (▷ page 120)
③ Switches the residual heat on or off (▷ page 121)
④ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 118)
⑤ Switches the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 121)
⑥ Sets the temperature, right (▷ page 119)
⑦ Switches the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 120)
⑧ Activates/deactivates climate control (▷ page 117)
⑨ Sets the air distribution (▷ page 119)
⑩ Increases the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑪ Reduces the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑫ Display
⑬ Adjusts the climate mode settings (▷ page 118)
⑭ Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (▷ page 121)
⑮ Sets climate control to automatic (▷ page 118)
Rear control panel
⑯ Increases the airflow (▷ page 119)
⑰ Sets the temperature (▷ page 119)
⑱ Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (▷ page 118)
⑲ Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (▷ page 119)
⑳ Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (▷ page 95)
②1 Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (▷ page 119)
②2 Switches the rear climate control on/off (▷ page 117)
②3 Reduces the airflow (▷ page 119)
②4 Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (▷ page 95)
Information about using automatic climate control
Optimum use of the automatic climate control
The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of the dual-zone or 3-zo automatic climate control.
-
You can switch on climate control by using
AUTO and A/C or AUTO and A/C REST buttons.
The indicator lamps in the AUTO and
A/C buttons or the AUTO and A/C REST button
light up. -
Vehicles with 3-zone climate control:in
automatic mode, you can also use the AIR FLOW button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/
MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. -
Set the temperature to 72^ (22 °C).
- Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.
- Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. there are unpleasant outside odors or when
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle air-recirculation mode.
- Vehicles with 3-zone climate control: used the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the ☐ button goes out.
• Vehicles with 3-zone climate control:use
the "residual heat" function if you want to heat
or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off.
- If you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display - appears for approximately three seconds at one bottom of the screen in the multimedia system display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button page 130).
Operating the climate control systems
Activating/deactivating climate control
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
climate control only briefly Activate climate control primarily using the AUTO button (page 118). In the rear compartment, you can also switch climate control on and off using the AUTO and OFF buttons.
Activating/deactivating
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ To switch on: press the AUTO button. The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to matic mode.
▶ To deactivate: press the OFF button. The indicator lamp in the OFF button lights up.
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off
Activating/deactivating
▶ To activate: press the A/C or A/C REST button.
AutoThe indicator lamp in the A/C or A/C REST button lights up.
▶ To deactivate: press the A/C or A/C REST button.
The indicator lamp in the A/C or A/C REST button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The indicator lamp in the A/C or A/C REST button flashes three times or remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on. | Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated automatically in automatic mode.
In the rear compartment, you can also switch climate control for the rear seats to automatic mode using the AUTO button.
Automatic control
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ Set the desired temperature.
▶ To activate: press the AUTO button. The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated.
▶ To switch to manual mode: press the button.
3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode ▷(page 118).
Adjusting the climate mode settings
You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-free setting
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ Press the AUTO button.
▶ Press the AIR FLOW button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display.
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
Different temperatures can be set for the er's and front-passenger sides.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the lock (▶ page 125).
▶ To increase or decrease: turn control ⑥ counter-clockwise or clockwise (▷ page 113).
Only change the temperature setting in smal increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
Front control panel
Directs the airflow through the center vents
Directs air through the footwell air vents Directs the airflow through the center and footwell vents
Directs air through the defroster vents Directs the airflow through the defroster and center vents (Canada only)
Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents
Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and footwell air vents (Canada only)
3-zone automatic climate control
You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ To increase or decrease temperature in the front compartment: turn control ① on √⑥ counter-clockwise or clockwise (▷ page 115).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
▶ To increase or reduce the temperature the rear compartment using the front trol panel: press the ☐zone button.
The indicator lamp in the ☐zone button goes out.
The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side.
Rear control panel
Directs the airflow through the rear center and B-pillar air vents Directs air through the footwell air vents
i Using the rear control panel, you can also activate both air distribution positions simultaneously. In order to do this, press both air distribution buttons. The air is then routed through all rear air vents.
con-
Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards.
▶ Turn thumbwheel ① to the left or right (▷ page 115).
Only change the temperature setting in smal increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
▶ To increase or decrease the rear compa ment temperature using the rear control
panel: turn control ⑰ counter-clockwise or clockwise on the rear control panel (▷ page 115).
Only change the temperature setting in smal increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
Adjusting
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition all lock ( page 125).
▶ Press the button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display.
Setting the airflow
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (> page 125).
▶ To increase: press the 🎩 button.
▶ To reduce: press the ☀ button.
You can use 3-zone automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately. • air distribution to the windshield and front window side windows • air-recirculation mode off
Switching the ZONE function on/off
▶ To activate: press the ☐zone button. The indicator lamp above the ☐zone button lights up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.
▶ To deactivate: press the ☐zone button. The indicator lamp above the ☐zone button goes out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.
▶ To deactivate: press the MAX button. The indicator lamp in the MAX button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running.
▶ To activate: press the MAX COOL button. The indicator lamp in the MAX COOL button lights up.
To deactivate: press the MAX COOL button. The indicator lamp in the MAX COOL button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions:
- maximum cooling
- maximum airflow
• air-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the win shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or side windows on the inside.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Activating/deactivating
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ To activate: press the MAX button. The indicator lamp in the MAX button lights up.
The climate control system switches to the following settings:
- high airflow
- high temperature
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
▶ Activate the A/C or A/C REST cooling with air dehumidification function.
▶ Activate automatic mode AUTO.
▶ If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "windshield defrosting" function
ition page 120).
You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
▶ Activate the windshield wipers.
▶ Press the 📋 button repeatedly until the 📋 or 📋 symbol appears in the display.
You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.
If you clean the windows regularly, they do the battery voltage is too low, the rear window not fog up so quickly. defroster may switch off.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current. The indicator lamp in the button lights draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon up or goes out. as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.
Switching on/off
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ Press the REAR button.
The indicator lamp in the REAR button lights 00Up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated.
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
▶ Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.
Switching on/off
Outside air is added after about 30 minute
▶ To deactivate: press the 📄 button.
The indicator lamp in the 📄 button goes out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:
• after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 °F (5 °C)
• after approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated
- after approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 °F (5 °C) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ To activate: press the 📄 button.
The indicator lamp in the 📄 button light; up.
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone automatic climate control only) or at high outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is It is possible to make use of the residual heat of automatically activated. When air-recirculation the engine to continue heating the stationary mode is activated automatically, the indoor vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has cator lamp in the button is not lit.
been switched off. The heating time depends the set interior temperature.
- Let's. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
Switching on/off
▶ To activate: press the REST or A/C REST but to The indicator lamp in the REST or A/C REST but lights up.
The blower will run at a low speed regard of the airflow setting.
If you activate the residual heat function a high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed
▶ To deactivate: press the REST or A/C rest but-SI ton. The indicator lamp in the REST or A/C rest button goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
• after approximately 30 minutes
- when the ignition is switched on
• if the battery voltage drops
Ionization
Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate.
The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle interior.
You can switch ionization on and off via the timedia system (see the separate operating instructions).
Ionization can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on. The side vent on the driver's side must be open.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:
- keep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
not never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the t-sliders of the air vents to the center position.
[Non-Text]
Setting the center air vents
text_image
Diagram of car dashboard navigation with numbered UI elements and directional arrows indicating system or system flow.① Center air vent, left
②ul-Center air vent, right
③ Center vent thumbwheel, right
④ Center vent thumbwheel, left
Tp open or close: turn thumbwheels ③ and ④ to the left or right.
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
Setting the side air vents
text_image
Car interior control panel with numbered arrows indicating directional movement or system flowExample
① Side window defroster vent
② Side air vent, left
③ Thumbwheel for side air vent
▶ To open or close: turn thumbwheel ③ down.
Setting the glove box air vent
! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.down.
At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged.
text_image
Car infotainment diagram showing a dial indicator with numbered labels and a highlighted connection point① Air vent control
② Air vent
When the climate control system is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings.
▶ To open or close: turn thumbwheel ① to the right or left.
Setting the rear-compartment air vents
Setting the center vents in the rear compartment
text_image
Diagram of car air conditioner panel with numbered ports and directional arrows indicating airflow or movementExample: center vents with rear control panel
① Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
② Rear-compartment air vent, right
③ Rear control panel
④ Rear-compartment air vent, left
▶ To open or close:turn thumbwheel ① up or
Setting the B-pillar air vent
text_image
Diagram of a car door with numbered parts and a blue arrow indicating direction, likely for safety or repair instructions.① B-pillar air vent
② Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
▶ To open or close:turn thumbwheel ② to the left or right.
Notes on breaking-in a new vehic
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of the teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pe
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.
- You should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km).
- Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle during this period.
- Change gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is 23 of the way to the red of the tachometer.
- Do not manually shift to a lower gear to br the vehicle.
- Try to avoid depressing the accelerator peda beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
- Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
- Only allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
- Change gear in good time.
- Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in the Comfort drive program.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the maximum permissible speed.
Driving
Important safety notes
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Rise operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.:
• shoes with thick soles
• shoes with high heels
- slippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can:
• overheat and cause a fire
- lose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off.
Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle two seconds recognition time. You can then use stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high the Start/Stop button. engine speeds and driving at full throttle until pressing the Start/Stop button several times in the engine has reached its operating temperature succession corresponds to the different Smart-ature. Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
Only shift the automatic transmission to the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal desired drive position when the vehicle is st-a-you depress the brake pedal and press the tionary. Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roadsA check which periodically establishes a radio. You could otherwise damage the drive trainconnection between the vehicle and the Smart
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 °F (+20 °C), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv
ing at full throttle when the engine is cold. • the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock.
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
text_image
0 1 2 3 P15.10-25To remove the SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers, such the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position
3 To start the engine
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.
Start/Stop button
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey:
- the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock.
- the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
- the vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO▷(page 72).
Do not keep the SmartKey:
- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey.
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
• inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.
Do not keep the SmartKey in the temperature-controlled cup holder▶(page 278). Otherwise the SmartKey will not be detected.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
as you will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button.
- you will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (page 77), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.
General notes
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately
Key positions with the Start/Stop button
text_image
Car infarometer control panel with labeled buttons and status indicators① Start/Stop button
② Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after start the engine or lights up while driving (▷ page 252).
If Start/Stop button ① has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
▶ To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button ① once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
• the driver's door is opened and
- you press Start/Stop button ① twice when in this position
▶ To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button ① twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button ① once when in this position, the ignition is switched off again.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey.
It is only possible to switch between Start/Ste button mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P.
▶ Remove Start/Stop button ① from ignition lock ②.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
- the vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop button
• electrically powered equipment can be operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:
• open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system parts of the engine that heat up. There is a of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.
▶Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button once (▷ page 125).
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the engine starts.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow activated and the engine starts.
General notes
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic observe the important safety notes on starting converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds the engine (page 126).
after a cold start. The sound of the engine change during this time.
Automatic transmission
▶ Shift the transmission to position P (▷ page 132).
The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows page 134).
You can start the engine in transmission position P and N.
Starting procedure via smartphone
Observe the important safety notes on starting the engine ▷ page 126).
You can also start your engine via your smart phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control setting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the journey.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain countries or regions.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
▶ To start a diesel engine: turn the Smart to position 2 in the ignition to page 125). The ☐ preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ig lock and release it as soon as the engine running (▶ page 125).
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm.
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts via your smartphone. If you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you can carry out two more starting attempts.
Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time.
You can only start the engine via your smartphone if:
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function.
the SmartKey is in the ignition lock
• park position P is selected
• the accelerator pedal is not depressed
the anti-theft alarm system is not activated
• the panic alarm is not activated
the hazard warning lamps are switched off
• the hood is closed.
y• the doors are closed and locked g• the windows and sliding sunroof are closed
Also make sure that:
• the fuel tank is sufficiently filled
- the starter battery is sufficiently charged
WARNING
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. There is a risk injury.
Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for example, if you
- switch on the hazard warning lamps
• do not lock the doors - open the hood
Pulling away
General notes
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pull away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down
You can open the doors from the inside at a time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature ( page 216).
It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you deprive the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved by the parking lock remains engaged.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speed after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake>(page 147).
Pulling away with a trailer
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel and a magnified inset showing the number 1 (no readable text or symbols)To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake.
▶ Press and hold handle ①.
The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada d only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster R remains on.
is Depress the accelerator pedal.
As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release lever ①. the electric parking brake is released.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Hill start assist own.
will start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
dal! WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
^3 There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill star assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
- you are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient.
• the transmission is in position N. - the electric parking brake is applied.
- ESP® is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopper under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically a you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.
General notes
natural_image
Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols① ECO start/stop display
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive programs Comfort and Slippery.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational when:
- the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green.
-
the Sport drive program is not selected
the Sport Plus drive program is not selected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles or Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC Coupe) -
the outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system
• the engine is at normal operating temperature - the set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached
• the battery is sufficiently charged - the system detects that the windshield is not and fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on
- the hood is closed
- the driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-
The ECO start/stop function is activated when ever you start the engine using the SmartKey of the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the (A)
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
- you switch off the ECO start/stop function pressing the ECO button
- in transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active
- you depress the accelerator pedal
- you engage reverse gear R
- you move the transmission out of position P
- you switch to the Sport drive program
- you switch to the Sport Plus drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles or Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC Coupe)
- you activate manual gearshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
- you unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door
• the vehicle starts to roll
• the brake system requires this - the temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range
- the system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system is switched on
- the battery's condition of charge is too low. Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
text_image
Car infotainment panel with labeled buttons and a circular diagram showing a device labeled 'A' with arrows and number 1.▶ To deactivate: press ECO button ①. Indicator lamp ② goes out.
▶ To activate: press ECO button ①. byIndicator lamp ② lights up.
If indicator lamp ② is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
text_image
Control panel interface with labeled buttons and a circular diagram showing a device labeled 'A' with arrows and a dial indicator.▶ To deactivate: in the Comfort drive program, press ECO button ①. or
▶ Activate manual gearshifting (▷ page 136). or
▶ Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive program (▶ page 132). Indicator lamp ② goes out.
▶ To activate: press ECO button ①. Indicator lamp ② lights up. When the Sport Plus or Sport drive program is activated, the automatic transmission switches to the Comfort drive program.
If indicator lamp ② is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction.
Problems with the engine
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. | There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orPress the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.Try to start the engine again (▷ page 126). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.If the engine does not start after several attempts:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. | The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged.Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 313).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| Vehicles with a gasoline engine:The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. | There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system.Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop. |
| The coolant temperature gage shows a value above 248 °F (120 °C). | The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is longer being cooled sufficiently.Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.Check the coolant level (▷ page 297). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. |
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change:
- the drive (engine and transmission management)
- the transmission
- the suspension
- the steering
- the availability of the ECO start/stop function Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, the Comfort drive program is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see page 126).
text_image
1 P20.25-94.07-31▶ Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller ① as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out.
In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed in the multimedia system display.
Available drive programs:
| Slippery | Optimal driving characteristics on slippery or snow-covered roads |
| Comfort | Comfortable and economical driving characteristics |
| Sport | Sporty driving characteristics |
| Sport Plus | Particularly sporty driving characteristics |
| Individual | Individual settings |
Additional information for drive programs (▷ page 135).
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
text_image
R N P N DP Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (▷ page 134).
Engaging park position P
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.
▶ Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P.
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
- you switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey
- you switch off the engine using the Smartk or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door
- the driver's door is opened when the vehicle stationary or driving at very low speed and transmission is in position D or R
Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or Distance DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (page 167) and on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (page 162).
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to when the vehicle is stationary.
▶ If the transmission is in position D or N: the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.
▶ If the transmission is in position P: depres the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SEL lever up past the first point of resistance.
Shifting to neutral N
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
• shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the
Vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
le is the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
▶ If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT pilot lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system:
Using the SmartKey:
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift to neutral N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
With the Start/Stop button:
▶ Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift to neutral N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
▶ If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
▶ If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
Transmission position and drive program display
The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.
text_image
R② N P ①—D1 ③ S P4.560898① Transmission position
② Gear
③ Drive program
The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D.
Transmission positions
P
Park position
Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary (▷ page 145). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
- you switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the Smart-Key
- you switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door
- the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R
R
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary.
N
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it.
If ESP ^ is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically.
! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train.
D
Drive
The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by:
• the selected drive program
- the position of the accelerator pedal
- the road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear:
- little throttle: early upshifts
- more throttle: late upshifts
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a low gear depending on the engine speed.
▶ Ease off the accelerator pedal once the ^10 desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting the transmission repeatedly between gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehicle's engine management system limits the
speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance.
Towing a trailer
▶ Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients.
▶ Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter ( page 136) to select a lower gear, even if cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC are activated.
Drive programs
Slippery drive program
The Slippery drive program has the following characteristics:
- reduced engine and transmission settings for optimum propulsion on slippery or snow-covered roads.
- optimized ESP® stability control on slippery or snow-covered roads.
- the vehicle has improved driving stability on slippery or snow-covered roads, for example.
Comfort drive program
The Comfort drive program has the following In the Individual drive program, the following characteristics: properties of the drive program can be selected:
- comfort-oriented engine and transmission settings.
- optimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
- the vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
- the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being dried at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin.
Sport drive program
The Sport drive program has the following characteristics:
- sporty engine and transmission settings.
- the automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.
- the suspension exhibits sporty damping (vehicles with AIRMATIC).
Sport Plus drive program
The Sport Plus drive program has the following characteristics:
- the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics.
• the vehicle pulling away in first gear. - the automatic transmission shifting up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.
- the suspension exhibits particularly firm springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC).
- the ECO start/stop function is deactivated, it can, however, be activated again using the ECO button ▷(page 130).
Individual drive program
In the Individual drive program, the following properties of the drive program can be selected:
• the drive (engine and transmission management)
- the transmission
- the suspension
- all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the steering
- all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): availability of the ECO start/stop function
To select the gears in the Individual drive program permanently using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the permanent manual gear-shift program.
Information about configuring the Individual
drive program with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Manual gear shifting
General notes
You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
/Inmediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted.
To use manual shifting, you have two options:
- temporary setting
- permanent setting
- If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-function display will show the current gear instead of transmission position D.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically.
Temporary setting
natural_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with steering wheel and illuminated controls (no readable text or symbols)▶ To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever position D.
▶ Pull steering wheel paddle shifter ① or ②.
Temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain.
▶ To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ② and hold it in place.
or
▶ Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position.
or
▶ Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program.
Permanent setting
text_image
M▶ To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever position D.
▶ Press button ①.
▶ To deactivate: press button ①.
▶ All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program.
▶ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to switch to the Individual drive program.
Shifting gears
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.
text_image
the ① ② P27-40-3773-51▶ To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ②.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage.
▶ To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ①.
The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.
Shift recommendation
text_image
R N P 1 T2 ① ② P4 33-3972-51The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display.
▶ Shift to recommended gear ② according to gearshift recommendation ① when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument ▶ cluster.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! The automatic transmission does not shift mix up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.
text_image
①—23 mph Up—② 183 °F 208 °F 179 °F① Gear indicator
② Upshift indicator
① Gear indicator
② Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display.
▶ When the UPP message appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
Kickdown
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible in the temporary setting.
- For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. - Shift back up once the desired speed is reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
Problems with the transmission
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The transmission has problems shifting gear. | The transmission is losing oil.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):The acceleration ability is deteriorating.The transmission no longer changes gear. | The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in position N.▶ Stop the vehicle.▶ Shift the transmission to position P.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles:The acceleration ability is deteriorating.The transmission no longer changes gear. | The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.▶ Stop the vehicle.▶ Shift the transmission to position P.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
Transfer case
! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for performance test.
! Because ESP ^ is an automatic system, the engine and ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Sto
button in position 0 or 1) when the electric Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamically, there is a risk of fire and explosion (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP may seriously damage the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as t doing so will damage the transmission.
Refueling
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale f vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
- Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
- If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.
WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.
WARNING
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasolinele. with diesel fuel.
engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality (▷ page 353).
Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes (▷ page 139).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the
Opening the fuel filler flap
text_image
Diagram showing car door panel installation with numbered components and blue arrows indicating direction of movement or change.① Opening the fuel filler flap
② To insert the fuel filler cap
③ Tire pressure table
④ Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO
▶ Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having removed.
The driver's door can be closed again.
▶ Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone▶(page 127).
▶ Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow ①.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
The fuel filler flap swings up.
▶ Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it.
▶ Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ②.
▶ Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.
▶ Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.
Closing the fuel filler flap
▶ Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
▶ Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (▶ page 236).
In addition, the ☐ Check Engine warning
damp may light up page 259).
| Problems with fuel and the fuel tank | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. | ⚠ WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.▶ Apply the electric parking brake.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO▶ Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.▶ Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine does not start. | The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry.▶ Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.▶ Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (▷ page 125).▶ Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.If the engine does not start:▶ Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds (▷ page 125).▶ Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.If the engine does not start after three attempts:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. | The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.▶ Unlock the vehicle (▷ page 71). |
| The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.▶ Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (▷ page 73). | |
| The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)
General notes
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after treatment must be operated with the reducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the tasks performed during maintenance. Under normal
operating conditions, a tank of DEF lasts until the next service due date.
When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the Check Additive See Operator's Manual
message is shown in the multifunction display. If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph (16 km/h), the Check Additive See Opera-
tor's Manual message goes out after approxDEF must not come into contact with your skin, imately one minute. eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed.
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the Keep DEF away from children.
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in the multifunction display.
If the RemainingStarts:16 message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is refilled, you will subsequently be unable to start the engine.
▶ Add at least 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF.
▶ Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds
▶ Start the engine.
i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified cialist workshop.
Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding DEF between maintenance intervals. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact Roadside Assistance ▷ (page 26).
If the outside temperature is below 12 °F (-11 °C) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is frozen there is an active warning indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It will then be possible to add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Important safety notes
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
- not poisonous
• colorless and odorless - not flammable
When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. For further information on DEF, see
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and ar ^€ page 355).
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.
If you or other persons come into contact with DEF, observe the following:
- Rinse DEF from your skin immediately with soap and water. not
- If DEF comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
ndf. DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seeko medical assistance without delay.
spChange out of clothing contaminated with DEF immediately.
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment system.
The vehicle must be parked on level ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a level surface. This avoids false level readings. Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle is not parked on a level surface. There is a danger of overfilling, which could result in damage to components of the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into contact with DEF immediately with water or remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge gas and cold water to clean it. DEF residues crystallize after time and contaminate the affected surfaces.
! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.
Opening/closing the DEF filler cap
text_image
Diagram showing two steps of an electric vehicle charging plug, labeled with numbered instructions and a blue arrow pointing to the first step.The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
▶ To open: switch the ignition off.
▶ Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow ①.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
▶ Turn blue DEF fuel filler cap ② counter-clockwise and remove it. DEF filler cap ② is secured with a plastic strip.
▶ To close: place DEF filler cap ② on the filler neck and turn it clockwise.
▶ To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the direction of arrow ①.
▶ Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). The Check Additive See Operator's Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.
i If the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message continues to be shown in the multifunction display, you must add more DEF.
DEF refill canisters
! Do not screw the disposable hose on too tight. The disposable hose could otherwise damaged and DEF may leak out.
text_image
① ② P47.10-2547-31▶ Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of DEF refill canister ②.
▶ Place disposable hose ① on the opening of DEF refill canister ② and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight.
Disposable hose ① remains closed until you fasten disposable hose ① to the DEF filler neck of the vehicle.
text_image
lock- filler ① ②▶ Place disposable hose ① on the filler neck on the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight. When you feel resistance, disposable hose ① is sufficiently secured.
▶ Lift up and tip DEF refill canister ②.
Filling stops when the DEF tank is completely filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF refill canister ② can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.
beTurn disposable hose ① on the filler neck of the vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Turn disposable hose ① on the opening of DEF refill canister ② counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Reseal DEF refill canister ② with the cap. DEF refill canisters are available at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop. DEF refill canisters are often sold with a filler hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit the vehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against
overfilling. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes-Benz offers a special disposable hose with overfill protection. You can obtain this from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is available in a variety of containers and receptacles. Only use the disposable hose with the Mercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.
DEF refill bottle
! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-tight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refill bottle could be damaged and DEF could leak out.
natural_image
Close-up of an electric vehicle charging at a station, showing plug and battery (no text or symbols visible)▶ Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bottle ①.
▶ Place DEF refill bottle ① on the filler neck shown and screw it on clockwise until hand tight.
▶ Press DEF refill bottle ① towards the filler neck.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to minute.
When DEF refill bottle ① is no longer pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be taken off again after being only partially emptied.
▶ Release DEF refill bottle ①.
▶ Turn DEF refill bottle ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bottle ① again.
DEF refill canisters are available at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill bottles without a threaded cap do not provide overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded seal. These are available at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Parking
Important safety notes
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
-When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
!ne Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally:
- the electric parking brake must be applied.
- the transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock.
- the front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
- the empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
- a laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for my example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
Switching off the engine
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
▶ Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove The immobilizer is activated.
▶ With KEYLESS-GO:
Press the Start/Stop button page 125)
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps the instrument cluster go out.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission system, it may not be possible to apply the position R or D, the automatic transmission released parking brake.
sion shifts to N automatically.
If you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to P. remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system:
▶ Vehicles with a SmartKey: switch on the qualified specialist workshop. ignition.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ All vehicles: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift to neutral N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds.
Electric parking brake
General notes
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
▶ If this is the case, only park the vehicle on a per level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
i The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal.
Applying or releasing manually
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel and a magnified inset showing the number 1 (no readable text or symbols)▶ To engage: push handle ①.
When the electric parking brake is engaged, the PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
i The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed.
▶ To release: pull handle ①.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
i The electric parking brake can only be released:
- if the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock (page 125) or
- if the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake>(page 128).
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and:
• the engine is switched off or
- the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle ①. The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if:
- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle to a standstill or
- the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary
- Parking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- the engine is switched off - the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened
• there is a system malfunction
• the power supply is insufficient
- the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period - the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the engine is running.
• the transmission is in position D or R.
• the seat belt has been fastened.
- you depress the accelerator pedal.
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake:
• the driver's door is closed.
- you have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
i Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move.
Emergency braking
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a magnified inset showing a key inserted into the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)The vehicle can also be braked during an emeof an accident. gency by using the electric parking brake. Do not switch
▶ While driving, push handle ① of the electric parking brake.
The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle of the electric parking brake is pressed. Thelf y longer the electric parking brake handle is mer depressed, the greater the braking force.
During braking:
• a warning tone sounds
- the ReleasePark.BBlake message appears
- the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.
Drive sensibly - save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
▶ The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.
▶ Remove unnecessary loads.
▶ Remove roof carriers when they are not needed.
▶ Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
▶ Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
▶ Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet or by the service interval play.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly rain.
Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal dent is greatly increased when you drink take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or a anyone to drive who has been drinking or ing drugs.
Emission control
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never lead the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
di ECO display
The ECO display shows you how economical in your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.
text_image
ECO DISPLAY ① ② ③ ④ 3.1 mi Bonus from Start P54-33-4228-31^c it Acceleration
② Coasting
③ Constant
Additional range achieved
Range ④ is shown under Bonfs Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve Fuel message is shown in the multifunction display instead of range ④.
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up (page 259).
The ECO display consists of three sections, with addition to driving style, the actual consump-an inner and outer area. The sections corre- tion is affected by other factors, such as: spond to the following three categories: • load
| 1 | Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes):the outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speedsthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration | • tire pressurecold start• choice of route• electrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO display.An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds.Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant":• observe the gearshift recommendations.• drive the vehicle in the Comfort drive program.On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change.The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (▷ page 210).For further information on the ECO display, see (▷ page 209). |
| 2 | Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes):the outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes.the outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking | |
| 3 | Constant(continuous evaluation over the entire journey):the outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and decelerationthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed | BrakingImportant safety notes |
The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particular you shift down on a slippery road surface in early economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously, an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas on a slippery road surface.
are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under BBonusSffr.Sstat does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a lower gear in good time. This allows you to take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively.
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water.
When you take advantage of engine braking you then have to depress the brake pedal more drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the on a slippery road surface. This could cause vehicle in front.
damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing t brakes to rub by constantly applying light pre
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.
sure to the pedal. This results in excessive a premature wear to the brake pads.
Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on loh and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden.
This also applies if you have activated cruise control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
This will use the braking effect of the engine, that less braking will be required to maintain t speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating• and wearing too quickly.
gyou drive on salted roads, a layer of salt positive may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance.
- Brake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. - Carefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey.
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.
Heavy and light loads
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
Servicing the brakes
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
- if the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and
- you hear a warning tone while the engine is running
Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
A function or performance test should only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the train engine and ignition must be switched off - (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the electric
parking brake is being tested on a brake driving on flooded roads
mometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP may seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do s depress the brake pedal firmly when driving at high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (▶ page 61) or of BAS PLUS on (▶ page 67)
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:
- you drive at low speeds.
• the tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner:
- lower your speed.
- avoid ruts.
- avoid sudden steering movements.
- brake carefully.
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: so select the raised vehicle level before driving at a through a body of water.
Off-road fording
7! Under no circumstances should you accelerate before entering the water. The bow wave could cause water to enter and damage the engine and other assemblies.
Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while fording. Otherwise, water could get into the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's electronics and interior equipment.
- Establish how deep the water is and the characteristics of the body of water before forde-ing.
e Select the highest possible vehicle level.
- Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
- Avoid high engine speeds.
- Enter and exit the water at a flat place and at a steady walking pace.
- Drive slowly and at an even speed through the water.
- Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive.
Do not stop and do not switch off the engine. Water offers a high degree of resistance, and the ground is slippery and in some cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and dangerous to pull away in the water.
• Clean any mud from the tire tread after ford-ing.
- Apply the brakes to dry them after fording. Always observe the fording depth values (▷ page 359).
Winter driving
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding an accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heat running, make sure the exhaust pipe and around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed:
▶ Shift the transmission to position N.
When driving in snow with or without snow chains, select driving program Slippery (▷ page 132).
i Vehicles with a diesel engine:do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective cover. The measuring function of the onboard diagnosis system may otherwise provide inaccurate values. Some of these values are required by law and must therefore always be accurate.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device a is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see ▷(page 323).
For more information on driving with summer tires, see ▷ page 323).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section ( page 341).
Off-road driving
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle.
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center of a way's gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill gradients. There is a risk of an accident. Select the lowest possible vehicle level.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle General notes
- the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Read this section carefully before driving your vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more
- you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. gentle off-road terrain first.
curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road. Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of - a heavy object strikes the underbody or your vehicle and the gear shift operation before parts of the chassis driving through difficult terrain.
In situations like this, the body, the under- The following driving systems are specially body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be adapted to off-road driving:
damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. • AIRMATIC package (vehicle level) (▷ page 169) DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) (▷ page 168)
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-Observe the following notes:
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or • Select a vehicle level that is suitable for the twigs can gather between the underbody and terrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make the underbody paneling. If these materials sure there is always sufficient ground clear-come in contact with hot parts of the exhaustion.
system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
- Check that items of luggage and loads are stowed safely and are well secured (▷ page 274).
- Always keep the engine running and in gear d when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate DSR (page 168).
• Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on a slope.
- Adapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher, d, steeper or more ruts on the terrain, the slower get your speed should be.
When driving off-road, substances such as sand mud and water or water mixed with oil may go into the brakes. This could result in a reduced braking effect or in total brake failure and also increased wear and tear. The braking characteristics change depending on the material ingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a reduced braking effect or grinding noises, have the brake system
checked in a qualified specialist workshop as • Look out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes, soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to three stumps and furrows. different braking characteristics. • Always keep the doors, the tailgate, the side
Driving off-road increases the likelihood of dam-windows and the sliding sunroof closed where age to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to the vehicle is in motion.
failure of the mechanical assembly or systems. Do not shift the automatic transmission to Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain con-transmission position N.
ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. - Observe the notes on off-road fording (▷ page 152).
Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear. Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.
Checklist before driving off-road
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up with the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in safe place as soon as possible. Check the engine oil level. The engine oil warning lamp warning must not be ignored. Continuing the journey while the symbol is displayed could lead to engine damage.
▶ Engine oil level: check the engine oil level and add oil if necessary.
When driving on steep gradients, the engine oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure correct oil supply in the vehicle.
▶ DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the level and add if necessary (page 142).
▶ Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack working and make sure you have the lug wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding spade in the vehicle.
▶ Wheels and tires: check the tire tread dep and tire pressure.
▶ Check for damage and remove any foreign objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/tires.
▶ Replace any missing valve caps.
▶ Replace dented or damaged wheels.
▶ Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a sl of tire pressure and damage the tire bead. Before driving off-road, check the wheels and replace them if necessary.
Checklist after driving off-road
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after driving off-road, have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and other road users.
▶ Deactivate DSR (▷ page 168).
▶ Lower the vehicle level again to a level suitable to the road conditions, e.g. to the norm level.
▶ Clean the headlamps and rear lights and check for damage.
▶ Clean the front and rear license plates.
▶ Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet and remove any foreign objects.
Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the vehicle underside with a water jet; check for any foreign objects and damage.
- Check whether twigs or other parts of plants have become trapped. These increase the risk of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.
After the trip, examine without fail the entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body-awork structure, steering, chassis and exhaust system for damage.
After driving for extended periods across sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirt conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, brake pads/linings and axle joints checked and cleaned.
If you detect strong vibrations after off-road travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels and drive train and remove them if necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the balance and cause vibrations.
Driving on sand
Observe the following rules when driving on sound:
Select a higher vehicle level.
- Avoid high engine speeds.
- Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to the terrain.
- Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could become stuck in loose ground.
- Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that:
the tire ruts are not too deep.
the sand is sufficiently firm.
the ground clearance of the vehicle is sufficient.
Tire ruts and gravel roads
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or bottom out and get stuck.
Observe the following rules when driving along Traveling uphill
ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose gravel:
- Select a higher vehicle level.
- Avoid high engine speeds.
- Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand ing wheel paddle shifter.
- Drive slowly.
- Where ruts are too deep, drive with the wheels of one side on the center grassy if possible.
Driving over obstacles
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask passengers for guidance when driving over large obstacles. The passenger should always keep a safe distance from the vehicle when doing so in order to avoid injury as a result unexpected vehicle movements. After driving off-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle for possible damage, especially to the underbody and the components of the chassis.
natural_image
Exterior view of a Mercedes-Benz SUV on a white surface (no signage or text visible)Observe the following rules when driving over vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles: Always observe the approach/departure angle
- Raise the vehicle level.
- Avoid high engine speeds.
- Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand st ing wheel paddle shifter.
- Drive very slowly.
- Drive straight over the center of obstacles.
Approach/departure angle
WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident.
are Always drive on a steep incline in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle.
- Observe the rules on off-road driving.
- Do not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines or gradients, but instead follow the direct line of fall.
- When driving down an incline, make use of the engine's braking effect. Observe the engine speed; do not overrev the engine.
e• Drive slowly.
- Avoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropriate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).
- Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients.
- Check the brakes after prolonged off-road driving.
Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on a hill. For further information about hill start assist, see ▷(page 128).
Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your
vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear. *Always observe the approach/departure angle values (page 360).
Maximum gradient-climbing capability
Always observe the maximum gradient climbing ability values ▷(page 360).
Hilltops
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the brow.
This style of driving prevents:
- the vehicle from lifting off the ground on the brow of a hill
- the vehicle from traveling too quickly down the other side
Driving downhill
- Drive slowly.
- Do not drive at an angle down steep inclinise braking effect of the engine. This relieves the Steer into the line of fall and drive with theoad on the brake system and prevents the front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, thebrakes from overheating and wearing too vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover.quickly.
- Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand pause cruise control only if road and traffic condle shifter before tackling steep downhill gratitions make it appropriate to maintain a steady dients. speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
- Activate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brakeroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
these braking effect of the engine. This relieves the head on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
adse cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
gently. When doing so, make sure that the vehicle is facing in the direction of the line fall.
- Check that the brakes are working normally after a long downhill stretch.
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep down-hill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use (
Cruise control should not be activated when driving off-road.
^y Important safety notes
The special off-road ABS setting enables a precise, brief and repeated locking of the front wheels. This causes them to dig into loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels easily skid across the ground surface if completely braked and therefore lose their ability to steer.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
- in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Driving systems
Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one vehicle thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems (▷ page 60).
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid
When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
there is a change of drivers, advise the new river of the speed stored.
there is a change of drivers, advise the new river of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
text_image
Diagram showing car interior with numbered parts and directional arrows, likely indicating vehicle movement or traffic flow.① Activates or increases speed
② Activates or reduces speed
③ Deactivates cruise control
④ Activates at the current speed/last stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds.
Storing or calling up a speed
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ③.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is operational and when first activated stores the current speed or regu- or lates the speed of the vehicle to the stored speed.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled:
• the electric parking brake must be released.
- you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km)
- ESP® must be active, but not intervening.
• the transmission must be in position D.
- DSR must be deactivated.
Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed
Storing and maintaining a speed
▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever up ① down ④.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set.
Press the cruise control lever up ① for a higher speed or down ② for a lower speed.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
▶ To adjust the set speed in5 mphincrements (10 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise trol:
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards ①.
or
▶ Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
- you engage the electric parking brake
- you are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
- you activate DSR
- you shift the transmission to position N while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
General notes
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there a risk of a collision, you will be warned visual and acoustically. Without your intervention, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle front or take evasive action provided it is safe do so.
For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driving on roads with steep gradients.
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
-
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
-
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any wambles, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:
- people or animals
- stationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped for parked vehicles
• oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic uation and be ready to brake.
WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always clearly identify other road users and complete traffic situations.
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC m
- give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle
- neither give a warning nor intervene
• accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC warns you.
WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is risk of an accident.
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations:
- when towing the vehicle
- in the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
- in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads
- on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid
- when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
exDistance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
• there is snow or heavy rain - there is interference by other radar sources
- there are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored.
This speed may:
- be too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane
- be so high when driving in the right-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand a lane
- be so high when driving in the left-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand lane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
text_image
Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts and a magnified view highlighting a specific component or feature.the Activates or increases speed
② Activates or reduces speed
③ Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
④ Activates at the current speed/last stored speed
⑤ Sets a specified minimum distance
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activation conditions
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- the engine must be started. It may take up two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is ready for use.
- the electric parking brake must be released.
- ESP® must be active, but not intervening.
- the transmission must be in position D.
- the driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must fastened.
- the front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed.
- DSR must be deactivated.
• the vehicle must not skid.
Activating
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ③, up ① or down ④.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator ped. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed.
If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DDistancePPIotPPassivemessage appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTROM when stationary. The lowest speed that can I set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ③, up ① or down ④.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
Activates at the current speed/last stored speed
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Ray attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ③.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Be The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored speed.
Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Pulling away and driving
▶ If you want to pull away with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ④.
or
▶ Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed.
be
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically.
If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise control.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Selecting the drive program
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style if you have selected the Sport Sport Plus drive program (page 135). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the Comfort drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle to a stop. set
Changing lanes
If you change to the overtaking lane, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if:
- you are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km)
- you switch on the appropriate turn signal
- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently detect a danger of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.
When you change lanes, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC monitors the right lane (in left-side traffic) or the left lane (in right-side traffic).
Stopping
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away
- there is a malfunction in the system or the voltage supply.
- DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vcle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
• the battery is disconnected. - the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake.
After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever.
The transmission is shifted automatically to position P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated and the vehicle stationary:
• the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
- the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated and the vehicle stationary:
- a system malfunction occurs.
• the power supply is not sufficient.
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is a malfunction, the transmission may also be automatically shifted into position P.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set.
▶ Press the cruise control lever up ① for a higher speed or down ⑤ for a lower speed
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
▶ To adjust the set speed in5 mphincrements (10 km/hincrements): briefly press
the cruise control lever up ① or down ② the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ②, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished over-taking.
Setting a specified minimum distance
text_image
Car interior diagram with numbered component labels and a magnified inset showing a blue circular component with directional arrows.You can set the specified minimum distance to Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function you can set the minimum distance th Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the veh cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction dis- play ( page 164).
▶ To increase: turn control ② in direction Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.
▶ To decrease: turn control ② in direction Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.
Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
text_image
ed is ot he ver- ①There are several ways to deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards ①.
or
▶ Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the Distance Pinlott coeff message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
for
i The last speed stored remains stored until is you switch off the engine.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished over-
③.taking.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:
①you engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake
- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
- the transmission is in the P, R or N position
-
you pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open
-
you activate Parking Pilot
• the vehicle has skidded
A warning tone sounds. The Distancel Pilot Off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:
- you activate DSR
- you activate the Off-Road Program+ (vehicle with the Off-Road Engineering package)
The DSR symbol appears in the multifur tion display.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
text_image
Close-up of a digital speedometer dial with numbered labels pointing to specific measurement ranges.Example: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the speedometer
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, one or two segments ② in the stored speed range light up.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle front, segments ② between speed of the vehicle in front ③ and stored speed ① light up.
For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
©Display in the assistance graphic when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
text_image
200 ft 200 ft 100 ft 0 ft ① ② ③ ④ P54.33-3659-31① Vehicle in front, if detected
② Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front
③ Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable
④ Own vehicle
▶ Select the AssistanceGraphic function using the on-board compute page 214).
Display in the assistance graphic when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
text_image
DISTRONIC PLUS 50 mph P54.33-3855-31① Vehicle in front, if detected
② Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable
③ Own vehicle
④ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
▶ Select the AssistanceGraphic function using the on-board compute page 214).
You will see the stored speed for approximately five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations:
- Cornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
- Driving on a different line: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
- Other vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will too short.
- Narrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow
width. The distance to the vehicle in front be too short.
- Obstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacle or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, I stance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them. - Crossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle pull away at the wrong time.
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distanc
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
General notes
text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with a magnified view of the dashboard and steering wheel, alongside partial text fragments.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions in a speed range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
Willmonitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system ① at the top of the windshield.
es a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h) the advanced automatic pulling away function focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), Steering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if clear lane markings are not present. With these conditions are not present, Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in Order for the function to be available.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact
with the curb or other road boundaries. Be pasteering Pilot cannot provide assistance:
ticularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. af intentionally driving over a lane marking, can corrected at any time if you steer slightly in opposite direction.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In son cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient
to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane.
The support provided by the system can be impaired if:
ts, on very sharp corners
- when towing a trailer
- when a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed
Observe the important safety notes on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (page 159).
The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient of the steering wheel after five seconds at the illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you fog or spray to take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot is
- there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, then switched to passive. Distance Pilot sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet).
- the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
- there are no, several or unclear lane markings ( page 214). for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work The Steering Pilot On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is
- the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too s and the lane markings thus cannot be dete ted
- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross on another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding
• there are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions. If:
- you actively change lane
- you switch on the turn signal
• take your hands off the steering wheel or not steer for a prolonged period of time
i After you have finished changing lanes, Steering Pilot is automatically active once more.
Activating Steering Pilot
Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot using the on-board computers ( page 214).
The Steering Pilot On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is activated.
Information in the multifunction display small
text_image
0 20:30 P54.33-3812-31^1 Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol ① appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol ① is shown in green. do
Deactivating Steering Pilot
▶ Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot using the on-board computer (▷ page 214).
The Steering Pilot Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering pilot is deactivated.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated automatically.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in following situations:
- when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
- when maneuvering on steep slopes
- when waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations:
- when towing the vehicle
- in the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (▷ page 167)
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
esthe vehicle is stationary
- the engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function
- the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened
• the electric parking brake is released - the transmission is in position D, R or N
ngDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLDAc function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.
Important safety notes
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if.
- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
- the HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
• the battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Activating the HOLD function
text_image
85°F HOLD 11:30▶ Make sure that the activation conditions are met.
▶ Depress the brake pedal.
Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ① appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.
If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if:
- you accelerate and the transmission is in - position D or R.
- you shift the transmission to position P.
- you accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. - you shift the transmission to position P.
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
- you depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ① disappears from the multifunction display.
- you secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake.
- you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P
- the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
- the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and:
• a system malfunction occurs.
• the power supply is not sufficient.
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there a malfunction, the transmission may also be automatically shifted into position P.
Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
General notes
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed selected on the on-board computer. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent. DSR controls the vehicle's speed when it is activated and the transmission is in position D, R or N-is. You can drive at a higher or a lower speed than that set on the on-board computer at any time by accelerating or braking.
Important safety notes
4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.
! A function or performance test should only be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.
WARNING
If the speed driven and the set speed deviate and you activate DSR on a slippery road surface, the wheels may lose traction. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Can Before switching DSR on, please take into consideration the road surface and the difference between driving speed and the set speed.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not always be able to keep to the set speed, depending on road surface and tire conditions. Select a
set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions The DSR symbol appears in the multi-and when necessary, apply the brakes manually function display with the off message.
Activating DSR
text_image
Close-up of a computer interface with labeled components and a magnified inset showing a device component with numbered callouts.▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② lights up.
The DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with then enabled message.
You can only activate DSR when driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the DSR symbol appears in the multifunction disp with the Max. speed 25 mph message (Canada: 400 km/h).
You cannot activate DSR if the Sport or Sport Plus drive program is activated. The DSR symbol and the NotIn drive program SPORT message then appears in the multifunction display.
If you have activated DSR and you change the drive program, DSR is deactivated.
Deactivating DSR
text_image
Close-up of a computer mouse with a magnified inset showing a car component labeled '1' and '2', likely indicating a device or function.▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② goes out.
DSR switches off automatically if you drive faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with the off-message. The status indicator in the multifunction display goes out. You also hear a warning. On vehicles with the Off-road Engineering package, if you select a different onroad/offroad program, DSR is also deactivated.
Changing the set speed
text_image
Diagram showing car interior with blue directional arrows and numbered annotations, likely indicating movement or flow in a vehicle.▶ To increase or reduce the set speed in 1 mph increments (Canada:
ort1 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise SR control lever up ① for a higher set speed or down ② for a lower set speed. s- The set speed appears in the multifunction display with the DSR symbol.
When DSR is activated, you can change the set speed to a value between 1 mph and 11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and 18 km/h).
The DSR set speed is always changed in 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h increments). This is regardless of whether you press the cruise control lever to or beyond the pressure point.
AIRMATIC package
General notes
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. Level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety
and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also The damping is tuned individually to each wheel the option to manually adjust the vehicle level and depends on:
AIRMATIC consists of:
- level settings
- level control and
• ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System)
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): your vehicle may also be equipped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM> page 171).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle is equipped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM. (▷ page 171).
Observe the notes on driving with a trailer (▷ page 200).
The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (page 132) or the level button (page 171). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function.
- your driving style, e.g. sporty
• the road surface conditions
• the drive program selected
• the vehicle level setting
Selecting Comfort mode
text_image
Close-up of a computer control panel with a magnified view highlighting the number 1, showing various function keys and buttons.Important safety notes
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Also select the Comfort drive program when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway.
▶ Select the Comfort drive program using of DYNAMIC SELECT controller ①. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) if you:
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, these vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are closed. Low-ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has been closed.
ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System) ^4
• drive at speeds above 78 mph (125 km/h)
The vehicle is raised again if you:
- drive at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle is:
- lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) if you drive at speeds above 112 mph (180 km/h)
raised again if you drive at speeds below 87 mph (140 km/h)
General notes
ADS PLUS automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping characteristics adapt to the current operating and driving situation.
Selecting Sport mode
text_image
Close-up of a computer control panel with labeled buttons and a magnified view showing the number 1.▶ Select the Sport Plus drive program using DYNAMIC SELECT controller ①. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the vehicle is lowered by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to the normal level.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabilizers to optimize both driving comfort and vehicle dynamics. Depending on the drive program The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. • rolling movement is reduced in the event of
DSR is not available in the Sport drive program. Changing surface undulations For further information on DSR, see ▷ page 168. • the roll angle when cornering is reduced • the driving is dynamic
▶ Select the Sport drive program using DYNAMIC SELECT controller ①.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 compared to the normal level.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle remains at the normal level.
Selecting Sport Plus mode
text_image
Close-up of a computer control panel with a magnified view highlighting the number 1, showing various function keys and buttons.- rolling movement is reduced in the event of changing surface undulations - the roll angle when cornering is reduced - the driving is dynamic
If you have selected the Sport drive program:
- the roll angle is reduced significantly - the driving is even more dynamic
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selected the Sport Plus drive program:
- the roll angle is reduced even more significantly
- the driving is designed for maximum dynamism
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in the Sport Plus drive program ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads or primarily when driving on race circuits.
DSR is not available in the Sport Plus drive gram. For further information on DSR, see (▷ page 168).
WARNING
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi-
cle could rollover more easily, for example a bend. There is a risk of an accident.
Always select as low a vehicle level as possible and adjust your driving style.
WARNING
When you drive with the chassis lowered or raised, the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics can be significantly impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle height if the chassis is raised. There is a rise in an accident.
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
WARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
level is lower; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the Vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has been closed.
Vehicles with no trailer coupled: below a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h), you can choose between the normal and raised vehicle level.
Select the normal vehicle level for normal road surfaces and the raised vehicle level for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if
icly you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. nt If you try to select raised level at a speed above 40 mph (64 km/h), the DeiverModeSlowly message appears in the multifunction display. road
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: below a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h), you can choose between to the normal and raised vehicle level.
Setting the raised vehicle level
When driving on extremely rough terrain, select a high vehicle level in good time. Make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. - In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.
text_image
Close-up of a computer mouse with a magnified inset showing a car component labeled '1' and '2', likely indicating a key or function.▶ Start the engine.
indicator lamp ② is not lit:
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② flashes while the vehicle is being raised, and lights up continuously as soon as the vehicle reaches the desired level.
The vehicle is raised by 2 in (50 mm) compared to the normal level.
General notes
Only select raised level if this is appropriate for the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption may increase and handling may be affected
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle The Vehicle Rising message appears in the adjust to the new level as quickly as possible multifunction display.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you paThe message remains until the raised level is the vehicle and the outside temperature reached.
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle
If you press the ← or OK button on multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear.
The raised level setting is canceled if you:
- drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
- drive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
- drive at speed s between 40 mph (64 km, and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately seconds (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
- drive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
- drive at speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h) a trailer
The raised vehicle level remains saved when are not driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal vehicle level
! Make sure that there is enough ground clearance when the vehicle is being lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging the underbody.
▶ Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ② is lit:
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② flashes while the vehicle is being lowered, and goes out as soon as the desired vehicle level is reached.
Vehicles with no trailer coupled: the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the selected drive program ▷(page 132).
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehicle is adjusted to normal level regardless of the drive program selected>(page 132). The vehicle remains at the normal level, even if the drive program is changed.
During the adjustment, the lowereng message appears in the multifunction display.
If you press the ← or OK button on multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear.
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
General notes
(all) The AMG adaptive sport suspension system is available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles and for the Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC.
The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:
20 your driving style, e.g. sporty
• the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
with your individual selection of Sport, Sport + Comfort
The suspension setting can be adjusted using the corresponding button in the center console or the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (▷ page 132).
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is gactivated. For further information about starting the engine, see▶(page 126).
Sport mode
text_image
1 2 3The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
▶ Press button ① repeatedly until indicator lamp ③ lights up.
You have selected Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension setting Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits.
If indicator lamps ② and ③ are off:
▶ Press button ① repeatedly until indicator lamp ② lights up. You have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
In "Sport +" mode, the vehicle is lowered by 10 mm compared to the normal level.
Comfort mode
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. highways.
▶ Press button ① repeatedly until indicator lamps ② and ③ go out. You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:
- switch on the ignition
- shift the transmission to position D, R or N
- release the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
Range of the sensors
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually and audibly indicates the distance between y vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, may sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located:
- below the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects.
- above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.
text_image
our is make er- ① ① ① PS4.65-5283-31When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are
① Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or sltome sounds. If the distance falls below the min-They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleinum, the distance may no longer be shown. the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them>(page 303). Warning displays
Range
text_image
P54.65-5.795-31
natural_image
Top-down view of a car with two side views showing height measurements in micrometers (no text or symbols on the car itself)Front sensors
| Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) |
| Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) |
Rear sensors
| Center Approx. | 48 in (approx. 120 cm) |
| Corners Approx. | 32 in (approx. 80 cm) |
Minimum distance
| Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) |
| Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) |
Warning displays
text_image
Car dashboard interface with numbered connection points and a magnified inset showing three connected componentsDriving and parking
① Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle
② Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle
③ Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness ③ light up.
The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running.
| Transmission position | Warning display |
| D | Front area activated |
| R, N or the vehicle rolling backwards | Rear and front areas activated |
| P | No areas activated |
One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning
From the:
- sixth segment onwards, you will hear an in mittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.
- seventh segment onwards, you will hear a cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to warning tone for approximately two seconds. position 2 in the ignition lock. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating or activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
text_image
OFF P切① Indicator lamp
② Deactivating or activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
① Indicator lamp
② Deactivating or activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp ① lights up, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot is then also deactivated.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Only the red segments the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button lights up. | Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been devated.▶ If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked qualified specialist workshop. |
| Only the red segments the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds. | The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inference.▶ Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (▷ page 303).▶ Switch the ignition back on. |
| The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or sound waves.▶ Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different location. |
Driving and parking
Parking Pilot
General notes
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also available (▶ page 174).
Important safety notes
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the r-wheels or tires.
Parking Pilot may show parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
- where parking or stopping is prohibited
- in front of driveways or entrances and exits
• on unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
- On narrow roads, drive as close to the parking range, stop and deactivate Active Parking space as possible. Assist.
- Parking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. For further information on the detection range
- Parking spaces that are partially occupied by (page 174). trailer drawbars might not be identified as Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in such or be measured incorrectly. spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel
- Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately.
- Pay attention to the warning messages of Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parking procedure ( page 174)
- You can intervene in the steering procedure, to correct it at any time. Parking Pilot will be canceled.
- When transporting a load that protrudes from your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot
- Never use Parking Pilot when snow chains are installed.
• Make sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Image, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
For further information on the detection range
page 174).
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel - two parking spaces are located directly next to one another
the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb - you park forwards
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in spaces parallel with or at a right angle to the direction of travel if:
• the parking space is on a curb - the system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
- parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel
• that are on straight roads, not bends
- that are on the same level as the road, e.g. on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the detection range of Parking Pilot will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken in account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks. Parking Pilot may therefore guide you into the parking space too early.
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range
• Active Park Assist may steer too early
- the vehicle may not stop in front of these objects
- Active Park Assist may steer too early - the vehicle may not stop in front of these objects
You may cause a collision as a result. There a risk of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
- the area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into
- the parking space is bordered by an obstacle, f e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
text_image
85°F P 11:30 ① ② ③Park-Detected parking space on the left ② Parking symbol ③ Detected parking space on the right Parking Pilot is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Parking Pilot will detect only parking spaces:
- parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel
- is that are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
- that are parallel to the direction of travel at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle
- that are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle
Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot measure the depth of parking spaces if they are at right angles to the direction of travel. You need to judge whether your vehicle will into the parking space.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ② as status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Parking Pilot displays only parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Parking Pilot by pressing the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 (15 m) away from it.
Parking
WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if:
- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
• the battery is disconnected. - the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are responsible for braking in good time.
Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.
Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No: file button message appears in the multifunction display.
To cancel the procedure: press the button on the multifunction steering wheel pull away.
To park using Parking Pilot: press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise, Parking Pilot will be canceled.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.
The Parking Pilot Active Select D Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
- Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other direction.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.
▶ Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill.
The Parking Pilot Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Parking Pilot Finished message
appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle Switch on the turn signal in the direction you is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary will drive out of the parking space.
without the driver having to depress the brake Shift the transmission to position D or R.
pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No: depress the accelerator pedal. message appears in the multifunction
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer-display.
ing interventions and brake applications. When Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. To cancel the procedure: press the button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.
Parking tips:
- The way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Parking Pilot.
- You can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does no drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order for Parking Pilot to assist you:
- the border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is small, for example.
- the border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45^ to the starting position as it is maneuvering into the parking space.
- a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available.
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a parking space only if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No: message appears in the multifunction
To cancel the procedure: press the button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.
or
▶ To exit a parking space using Parking
Pilot: press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- tage appears in the multifunction display.
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot will be canceled.
Shift the transmission to position D or R as required or according to the message while the vehicle is stationary.
Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other direction. The ParkingP PilotActive Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position.
Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning disngplays, several times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Parking Pilot Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Parking Pilot
▶ Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Parking Pilot is immediately canceled. The Parking Pilot Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.
or
▶ Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button (▷ page 176). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled. The Parking Pilot Cancelled message appears in the multifunction display.
Parking Pilot is canceled automatically if:
• the electric parking brake is engaged
- transmission position P is selected
- parking using Parking Pilot is no longer possible
- you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
- a wheel spins, ESPintervenes or fails. The warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol appears and the multifunction display shows Parking Pilot Canceled message.
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steel and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again.
Rear view camera
General notes
natural_image
Side view of a car's front bumper with a close-up inset showing the engine shift lever (no text or symbols visible)vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
The text shown in the multimedia system display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera displays in the multimedia system.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner:
- if the trunk lid is open - in heavy rain, snow or fog
is-at night or in very dark places
heif the camera is exposed to very bright light
- if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED or lighting (the display may flicker)
- if there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-meter
- if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Observe the notes on cleaning (▷ page 303)
- if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
For technical reasons, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chassis.
The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust. When the rear view camera is switched on, the Mercedes emblem opens with the rear view camera in the cover on the tailgate.
Rear view camera ① is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
The emblem closes again when:
- you have finished the maneuvering proces
- you switch off the engine
- you open the trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning page 303).
For technical reasons, the emblem may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated.
Activating/deactivating the rear view camera
▶ To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Make sure that the Activation by R gear ② function is selected in the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-media system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines. ④
The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or af driving forwards a short distance.
Displays in the multimedia system
The rear view camera may show a distorted of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at The rear view camera does not show objects the following positions:
• very close to the rear bumper
• under the rear bumper
- in the area immediately above the tailgate handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.
• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
- a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.65-5270-31① Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
is imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
② White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current ehi-steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking of the tires at current vail-steering wheel angle (dynamic)
text_image
after view all in P54.65-5271-31⑤ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
⑥ Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
⑦ Bumper
⑧ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.
text_image
P54.65-5272-31① Front warning display
② Additional measurement operational readiness indicator for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
③ Rear warning display
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONICReverse perpendicular parking with the when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- steering wheel at an angle
tional (page 174), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ② appears in the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays ① and ③ are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking spa without turning the steering wheel
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.65-5273-31① White guide line without turning the steer wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
③ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
④ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
▶ Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on ✝ page 182). The lane and the guide lines are shown.
▶ Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on ✝ page 182). The lane and the guide lines are shown.
▶ With the help of white guide line ①, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.
▶ Using white guide line ① as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ④ is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
- With the help of white guide line ①, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. - Using white guide line ① as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ④ is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
text_image
① ② P54.65-5274-31
text_image
① ② P54.65-5274-31① Parking space marking
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
▶ Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill.
▶ Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on ☑ page 182).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
▶ While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ② reaches parking space marking ①.
- Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.
text_image
1 P54.65-5275-31① Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
▶ Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.
text_image
① ② P54.65-5276-31① White guide line at current steering wheel angle
② Parking space marking
▶ Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary.
text_image
① ② ③ P54.65-5277-31① Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
② White guide line without turning the steering in wheel
③ End of parking space
Back up carefully until you have reached the final position.
Red guide line ① is then at end of parking space ③. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
180^ view
text_image
① ② ③ P54.65-5269-31① Symbol for the 180^ view function
② Own vehicle
③ Warning displays for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
You can also use the rear view camera to select a 180° view.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (page 174), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays ③ light up in the multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras.
The system processes images from the following cameras:
- Rear view camera
- Front camera
- Two cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors. The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit.
You can show pictures from the 360° camera in full-screen mode or in seven different split-screen views on the multimedia system display.
A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The six split-screen views are:
- Top view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) Im
- Top view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle)
- Top view and enlarged rear view
- Top view and enlarged front view
- Top view and rear-view images from the exterior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
- Top view and forward-view images from the exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic guidelines are hidden.
When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously select front or rear view.
Distances measured by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:
- yellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active
- yellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle
- red line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front wheel and side panel, showing a dial indicator and a numbered component (no readable text or symbols)Camera ① in the rear is integrated into the emblem and thus protected from dust and dirt. The emblem opens when the 360° camera is activated. Observe the notes on cleaning (> page 303).
Important safety notes
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a substitute for attentive driving.
You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
eYou are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
The 360^ camera will not function or will function in a limited manner:
- in split screen view as red or yellow brackets if the doors are open
around the vehicle icon in the top view, or • if the exterior mirrors are folded in - at the bottom right as red or yellow bracketsif the tailgate is open
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode in heavy rain, snow or fog
The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is away from an o
• at night or in very dark places
- if the cameras are exposed to very bright light
- if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker)
- if there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter
- if the camera lenses are dirty or covered
- if the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. YoThe 360° camera images can be automatically can otherwise injure others or cause damage displayed by engaging reverse gear. objects or the vehicle.
Guide lines are always shown at road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer coupling.
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (license plate holder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in:
• inaccuracies in the guide lines
- inaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view)
Activation conditions
The 360^ camera image can be displayed if:
- the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock
• the multimedia system is switched on
- your vehicle is equipped with a 360^ camera the controller.
Switching on the 360° camera
▶ Press the 📄 button in the center console for longer than two seconds. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown:
- a split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or
- a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera
or
▶ Press the button in the center console
The vehicle menu is displayed.
▶ Select 3560°C camera and press ⚙ to confirm Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown:
- a split screen with top view and the image - from the front camera or - a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera
^nt Activating the 360^ camera using ^ed reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 n in the ignition lock.
▶ Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions.
To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera.
Selecting the split-screens or 180° view
Selecting split-screen view
▶ To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide ↑◎ the controller.
▶ To select one of the vehicle icons: turn [◎]
To switch to 180^ View: turn (☐) the controller to select 180^ View and press ☑ to confirm.
The 1880°View option is only available in the following views:
- Top view with picture from the rear view camera
- Top view with picture from the front camera
Displays in the multimedia system
\$ important safety notes
The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations:
• under the front and rear bumpers
• very close to the front and rear bumpers
- in the area immediately above the tailgate handle
- very close to the exterior mirrors - in the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view
! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
- a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom most guideline.
text_image
S O : 6 7 9 8 P54.65-4872-31⑥ Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) ⑦ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
view ⑧ Bumper
⑨ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the rear view camera
text_image
① ② ⑤ ④ ③ P54.65-4871-31① Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
② Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image
③ Guide line for the maximum steering angle
④ Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
⑤ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
text_image
e op e t ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P54.65-4869-31① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
text_image
s O : 6 7 9 8 P54.65-4872-31⑤ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
⑥ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
natural_image
Top-down view of a car with a cable and a close-up of the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged
② Red guide line at a distance of approximat 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehic
This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.
You can also select the camera setting in the exterior mirrors for the rear-facing view.
Top view with trailer view
text_image
Security camera screenshot showing a car and its navigation screen with numbered annotations pointing to the scene.① Symbol for the trailer view setting
② Trailer drawbar marker assistant
③ Ball coupling
④ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the ball coupling
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer couple coupling.
For technical reasons, the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch is only partially visible in the multimedia system display.
Top view with image from the camera 180° view the exterior mirrors
text_image
① ② ③ P54.65-4868-31① Symbol for setting the top view with image from the forward camera in the exterior mirrors
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle)
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle)
text_image
① ② ③ P54.65-4870-31① Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image
Own vehicle
③ Warning displays for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
i 180° view can also be selected as front view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example.
Exiting 360° camera display mode
The 360^ camera display is stopped:
- when you select transmission position P, or
- when you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears in the multimedia take a break system. You can also switch the display by selecting the symbol in the display and pressing the controller to confirm. Displaying the
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
Important safety notes
The attention level evaluation is deleted and restarts when the journey is continued, if:
- you switch off the engine
- you take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or the
- you switch off the engine
- you take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or the
Displaying the attention level
text_image
ATTENTION ASSIST Break 02:35 h Ago Attention Level Low High P54.33-3863-31You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (page 213) of the on-board computer.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION might not always recognize fatigue or increasing ASSIST using the on-board computer inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them (▶ page 214).
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all:
- if the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes
- if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes
- if there is a strong side wind
- if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration
- if you are predominantly driving slower than A 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h)
- if you are driving with the Steering Pilot of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
- if the time has been set incorrectly
- in active driving situations, such as when change lanes or change your speed
The following information is displayed:
• Length of the journey since the last break.
the attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low.
- If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the Systemss uppeeded message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
with 87 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph el-(200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
▶ Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer ( page 214).
The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected:
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which out the system determines the attention level is set to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist
is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is earlier. passed, the display of the speed limits is updated. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
symbol and OFF appear in the multifuncTraffic signs with a restriction indicated by an tion display in the assistance display when the additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also engine is running. shown.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, the traffic signs are only displayed with the it is automatically reactivated after the engine restrictions if:
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). • the regulation must be observed with the restriction, or Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
Warning in the multifunction display
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration maximum permitted speed from any of the available are detected, a warning appears in the multi-able sources, no speed limit is displayed in the function display: Attention Assist: Take a instrument cluster either.
Break!
In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warning tone.
▶ If necessary, take a break.
▶ Confirm the message by pressing the OK button on the steering wheel.
OK
On long journeys, take regular breaks in time to allow yourself to rest. If you do a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in tration.
text_image
① 20.5 °C R E P64.33-3602-31Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all counts. In this case, symbol ① is shown in the assistance graphic display>(page 214).
Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issued to correctly display speed limits. Traffic in the multifunction display, a service station signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign search is performed in COMAND. You can select assist display.
a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date.
Traffic Sign Assist
General notes
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
uable to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.
The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date.
Instrument cluster display
Displaying the assistance graphic
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed Call up the assistance graphics display func-permitted to the driver in the instrument clusterion using the on-board computer The data stored in the navigation system and (▷ page 214).
general traffic regulations are used to determine Select the Traffic Sign Assist display. the current speed limit. Detected traffic signs are displayed in the As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, instrument cluster.
As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road-works) are not detected.
Speed limit with unknown restriction
text_image
① 80 ② 60 ③ Limited P54:33-3865-31① Maximum permitted speed
② Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign relevant
③ Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph
(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist ▷(page 191) and Lane Keeping Assist ▶(page 193).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
- vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area
- vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by the cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Bfind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
- narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
text_image
118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 in (300 cm) P54-70-2693-31Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 (30 km/h), warning lamp ① on the correspond- (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next tong side lights up red. This warning is always your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
case if there are vehicles driving at the inner The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse edge of their lanes. gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lane is no longer active.
may not be shown if they are too far away. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps Due to the nature of the system: is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.
- warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane Co borders.
- the warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such trucks.
Warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a circular inset showing a directional control panel (no text or symbols visible)① Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp ① in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp ① on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp ① flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp ①.
Where are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
▶ Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board compute page 214).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trail lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is dead
tivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the BidisSpot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors.
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist whe
- the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ign lock
• the engine is not running
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a magnified inset showing a steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)① Lane Keeping Assist camera
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front your vehicle with camera ①, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keep Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally.
This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km). A warning may be given if a front wheel passe over a lane marking. It will warn you by mean intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
• give an unnecessary warning
lemot give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function if:
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) - the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction - the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected
- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding
• there are strong shadows cast on the road
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (▷ page 215). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (▷ page 214) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP ^ .
- you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
- you brake hard.
- you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
- you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
- you approach the outer lane marking on a bend.
• the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. - the system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
• the road has narrow lanes.
- you cut the corner on a bend.
Driving Assistance PLUS package
General notes
The Driving Assistance Plus package consists of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC( page 159), Active Blind Spot Assist ( page 194) and Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 197).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not directly visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving.
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
- vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area
- vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
- This device may not cause harmful interference, and
- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
text_image
118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 is (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 in (300 cm) P54.70-2693-31Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to e10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensors
must not be covered, for example by cycle range. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow or overhanging loads. Following an accident vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have only detect them too late.
function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly;
Monitoring area
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacle
R there is dirt on the sensors or anything else re covering the sensors
R poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray vehicles in the monitoring range are then not reliably indicated.
Ave Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or the only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane.
On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lane may not be shown if they are too far away. Due to the nature of the system:
^R warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.
R warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time.
Indicator and warning display
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a circular icon highlighting a key point (no text or symbols)① Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp ① in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range at speeds above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp ① on the correspond
ing side lights up red. This warning lamp always lights up when a vehicle enters the blind spots in the speed range between 20 mph monitoring range from behind or from the side: (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
When you overtake a vehicle with a difference in Either no braking application, or a course-cor-speed of less than 7 mph (12 km/h), a delayed brake application adapted to the driving warning occurs. situation occurs if:
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the brightness of the surroundings.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change la and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collisi
warning. You then hear double waning tone and red warning lamp ① flashes. If the turn s nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp ①. There no further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.
WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp ① flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course-cor- yedting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if:
- there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, close to both sides of your vehicle.
- a vehicle approaches you too closely at the side.
- you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
- you brake or accelerate significantly.
anes driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
ion ESP® is switched off.
- a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is sig- - detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
▶ Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 214).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ig lock.
Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailer
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of incident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account good, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously correctly established the electrical connection. keep your vehicle in its lane.
This can be accomplished by checking the trail lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivi vated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in exterior mirrors and the Active Bid In Spot Asst. Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a magnified inset showing a steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)ailer WARNING
the Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can:
- give an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle
• not give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
The system may be impaired or may not function if:
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area i front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera ① at the top of the windshield. Variou different areas to the front, rear and side of y vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in a speed range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational.
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, infog or spray
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if your the road surface is wet) - the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work - the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding
- there are highly variable shade conditions of the roadway
- no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane there are broken lane markings
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel pass over a lane marking. It will warn you by mea intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane may leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. warns you accordingly. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
- you approach the outer lane marking on a bend
• the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway
• the system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
• the road has narrow lanes - you cut the corner on a bend
Lane-correcting brake application
WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warn you or makes a lane-correcting brake application.
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
natural_image
Black and white illustration of a car with a numbered arrow pointing to the front side (no text or symbols on the car itself)If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display ① appears in the multifunction display.
A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognized as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized.
In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehicles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.
A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
- you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
- you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
- you have switched on the turn signal.
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
- you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
- ESP® is switched off.
• the transmission is not in position D.
- on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established.
- an obstacle has been detected in the lane which you are driving.
- when a loss of tire pressure or a defective has been detected and displayed.
lighting. Lane-correcting brake application does not take place when towing a trailer. Active Lane Keeping Assist is not activated and the lines in the assistance graphic are gray.
There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you:
• steer slightly in the opposite direction.
- switch on the turn signal.
- clearly brake or accelerate.
A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.® ESP PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
- lane markings are no longer detected.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assi
▶ Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (▷ page 215).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (▷ page 214) are shown in green. Active La Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this ev the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this ev the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP.
- you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
- you brake hard.
- you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
- you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the tra
Towing a trailer
Important safety notes
WARNING
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling mayresult in overloading of the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle. This applies especially if theball coupling in question is longer or angled-differently. This could seriously impair thedriving characteristics and the trailer can
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
You should only ever install a ball coupling that has the permissible dimensions and that is designed to meet your trailer-towing requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow hitch.
You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (page 361).
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or not secured with the bolt provided and the corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as described. Before every journey, ensure that the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and the corresponding spring cotter.
WARNING
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehicle/trailer combination could even rollover. There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle speed and do not countersteer. Apply the brake as necessary.
Please observe the manufacturer's operating instructions for the trailer coupling if a detachable trailer coupling is used.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached.
Make sure that the following values are not exceeded:
- the permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
• the permissible trailer load - the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
- the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer
The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found:
• in the vehicle documents
- on the identification plates for the trailer tow hitch and the trailer
• on the vehicle identification plate
If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
- is heavier
- is restricted in its acceleration and gradient climbing capability
• has an increased braking distance
• is affected more by strong crosswinds
• demands more sensitive steering
• has a larger turning circle
This could impair the handling characteristics.
When towing a trailer, always adjust your spe to the current road and weather conditions. not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame.
Do not exceed the legally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the relevant country.
This lowers the risk of an accident.
- Only install an approved trailer coupling on your vehicle.
Further information on availability and on installation is available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. - The bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable for installing detachable trailer couplings.
- Do not install hired trailer couplings or other detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers of your vehicle.
- If you no longer need the ball coupling, remove it from the ball coupling recess. This will reduce the risk of damage to the ball coupling.
When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for the maximum load. You will find the values in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap of the vehicle (▷ page 339).
Please note that when towing a trailer, the following driving systems have limited availability or are not available at all:
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (▷ page 174)
- Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 191)
• Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 197)
On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the load placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.
You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data">(page 361).
Driving tips
Notes on towing a trailer
General notes
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system and drive tramay be necessary, depending on the vehicle type.
Observe the information on E ^® trailer stabilization ( page 66) and on pulling away with a trailer ( page 128).
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permissible speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to find out whether this applies to your vehicle (▶ page 361). If you utilize any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h).
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer.
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on lor and steep downhill gradients.
This also applies if you have activated cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
This will use the braking effect of the engine, that less braking will be required to maintain speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously.
Driving tips
If the trailer swings from side to side:
▶ Do not accelerate.
▶ Do not counter-steer.
▶ Brake if necessary.
- Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer.
- Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
- The values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decreases with increasing altitude.
Installing the ball coupling
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed and secured, it can come loose during the
journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as described. Before every journey, ensure that the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and the corresponding spring cotter.
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or not secured with the bolt provided and the corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. Always install and secure the ball coupling as described. Before every journey, ensure that the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and the corresponding spring cotter.
WARNING
the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling is installed and secured correctly before every journey.
text_image
Diagram showing car wheel and key adjustment with directional arrow, alongside partial German text and watermark▶ Pull protective cap ① in the direction of the arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
▶ Stow protective cap ① so that it cannot be thrown around.
Observe the loading guidelines page 270) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (page 270).
text_image
Diagram showing a car's side-mounted sensor or sensor assembly with labeled component 2 and directional arrow
natural_image
Close-up of a car's wheel assembly with a magnified inset showing a blue arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)
text_image
Diagram showing a car's side-mounted sensor or connector with numbered parts and an arrow indicating direction.▶ Secure the bolt using spring cotter ⑥.
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)▶ Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball
coupling recess ② in the direction of the arrow until the holes in ball coupling ③ a
line with the holes in ball coupling recess
▶ Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring cotter e for correct installation.
④. If the ball coupling cannot be correctly mounted, remove the ball coupling. Under these circumstances, the ball coupling must not be used for trailer towing.
Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front suspension system with a blue arrow and numbered component (no text or symbols visible)Coupling up a trailer
▶ Slide bolt ⑤ into the hole in the ball coupl recess and the ball coupling to the stop.
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with
pling an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result in a loss of function of the brake systems of both the vehicle and the trailer.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Vehicles with AIRMATIC package: select normal level and the Comfort drive program.
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Close the doors and tailgate.
▶ Couple up the trailer.
▶ Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
▶ Check that the trailer lighting system is wo ing.
▶ Push the combination switch upwards/downwards and check whether the corresponding turn signal on the trailer flashes.
A trailer that is connected is recognized only when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is worn
ing properly. The function of other systems al depends on this, for example:
- ESP®
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
- Parking Pilot
• Active Blind Spot Assist
• Active Lane Keeping Assist
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if you couple up a trailer, the vehicle always remains at normal level. When coupling up a trailer, please observe the following:
- If the normal level has not been set manually, the vehicle is automatically lowered to normal level. This is the case if a speed 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.
- The Sport drive program is not available.
These restrictions apply to all accessories powered through a connection to the trailer power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle carrier.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimensions (width and length).
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces require by law:
- Safety chains between the towing vehicle and the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound under the trailer drawbar. They must be fastened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to the bumper or the axle.
Leave enough play in the chains to make tig cornering possible.
- A separate brake system for certain types of trailer.
- Safety switch for braked trailers. Check the specific legal requirements applicable to your state.
If the trailer becomes detached from the towing vehicle, the safety switch applies the trailer brakes.
Towing a trailer
There are numerous legal requirements concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restrictions. Make sure that your car/trailer combination complies with the local regulations:
• in your place of residence
- in the location to which you are driving
The police and local authorities can provide reliable information.
Observe the following when towing a trailer:
- To gain driving experience and to become accustomed to the new handling characteristics, you should practice the following in a traffic-free location:
- cornering
- stopping
- backing up
• Before driving, check:
- trailer tow hitch
-
safety switch for braked trailers
-
safety chains
- electrical connections
d of lights
- wheels
- Adjust the exterior mirrors to provide an unobstructed view of the rear section of the trailer.
- If the trailer has electronically controlled brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually using the brake controller and check whether the brakes function correctly.
- Secure any objects on the trailer to prevent the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is in motion.
When you couple up a trailer, check at regular intervals that the load is firmly secured. If the trailer is equipped with trailer lights and brakes, check the trailer to ensure that these are working.
- Bear in mind that the handling will be less of stable when towing a trailer than when driving without one. Avoid sudden steering movements.
The vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, accelerates more slowly, has a decreased gradient climbing capability and a longer braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and requires more careful steering.
- If possible, do not brake suddenly, but instead depress the brake pedal moderately at first so that the trailer can activate its brakes. Then meath the vehicle being trapped. There is a risk of injury.
increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel housings or under the vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable. - If the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on uphill or downhill vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable. dients, shift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
A lower gear and lower speed reduce the of engine failure.
- When driving downhill, shift to a lower gear utilize the engine's braking effect.
Avoid continuous brake application as this may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if in led, the trailer brakes.
- If the coolant temperature increases dramatically while the air-conditioning system is switched on, switch off the air-conditioning system.
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by op ing the windows and switching the ventilat blower and the interior temperature to the highest level.
- When overtaking, pay particular attention to the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.
Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combination, you require additional road space in relation to the vehicle you are overtaking before you can change back to the original lane.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
tal Start the engine.
▶ Close the doors and tailgate.
▶ Apply the trailer's parking brake.
▶ Detach the trailer cable and decouple the trailer.
▶-Switch off the engine.
Permissible trailer loads and drawbar loads
Weight specifications
Maximum allowable gross mass
The gross vehicle weight of the trailer is calculated by adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of the load and equipment on the trailer. You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (page 361).
Permissible noseweight
You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data">(page 361).
Decoupling a trailer
WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun brake engaged, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. There is a risk of injury.
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun bra is engaged.
WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you disconnect the trailer cable. This could result in you limbs or those of other people that are between the vehicle body and tires or under-
Loading a trailer
When loading the trailer, make sure that neither the permissible gross weight of the trailer nor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate located on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible values on the type plates of your vehicle and the trailer. When calculating how much weight
the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay attention to the respective lowest values. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply.
- The trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling the trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at must be added to the rear axle load to avoid the factory with a permanent power supply.
exceeding the permissible gross axle weight. The permanent power supply is supplied via the permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate located on a trailer socket pin 4.
cated on the identification plate located on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle sup
Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load voltage and after six hours at the latest.
where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts for 8 % to 15 % of the trailer's missibl e gross weight.
A qualified specialist workshop can provide before information about installing the trailer electrics.
The weight of additional accessories, passengers, and cargo reduces the permissible trailer load and drawbar load for your vehicle.
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
- To check that the weights of the towing vehicle and the trailer comply with the maximum permissible values, have the vehicle/trailer combination (including the driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated weighbridge.
- Check the gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer and the trailer drawbar noseweight.
Removing the ball coupling
▶ Remove the spring cotter.
▶ Remove the bolt from the ball coupling recess.
▶ Remove the ball coupling from the ball coupling recess.
▶ Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
▶ Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot be thrown around.
Observe the loading guidelines ▷ page 270) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (▷ page 270).
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer tow hitch ▷(page 304).
Trailer power supply
! Accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 W can be connected to the permanent power supply.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The on-board computer only shows messages warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (> page 33).
▶ Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If you turn the light switch to AUTO, 300≤ or D, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available.
Cruise control activated (▷ page 157):
The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed.
- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated (▷ page 159):
One or two segments in the set speed range light up.
- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this or could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (▷ page 33).
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (page 208).
There is a short delay before a change in out temperature appears in the multifunction display.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
Coolant temperature gauge
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.
text_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled parts including steering wheel, speedometer, and air condition indicators! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 °F ① Multifunction display (120 °C), do not continue driving. The engine ④ Right control panel will otherwise be damaged. ③ Left control panel
The coolant temperature gage is in the instru▶ To activate the on-board computer: turn ment cluster on the right-hand sid(page 33). the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 °F (120 °C).
We can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system: you can find further information on the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions.
Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia system: you can find further information on voice-operated navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Left control panel
| • Calls up the menu and menu bar | |
| Press briefly:• Scrolls in lists• Selects a submenu or function• In theAddioo menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene• In theTee1 (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number | |
| Press and hold:• In theAddioo menu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling• In theTee1 (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open | |
| • Confirms the selection or display message• In theTee1 (Telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number | |
| Press briefly:• Back• Switches off voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System• Hides display messages or calls up the lastTripmenu function used• Exits the telephone book/redial memory | |
| Press and hold:• Calls up the standard display in thTripmenu |
Right control panel
 | • Rejects or ends a call• Exits the telephone book/redial memory |
 | • Makes or accepts a call• Switches to the redial memory |
 | • Adjusts the volume |
 | • Mute |
 | • Switches on voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System |
Multifunction display
text_image
62°F 11:30 123.0 miles 26753 Trip Navi Audio Tel R N P D Eem① Permanent display: outside temperature or up speed (>page 215)
② Time
③ Text field
④ Menu bar
⑤ Drive program (▷ page 134)
the⑥ Transmission position (▷ page 134)
▶ To display menu bar④: press the
or ▶ button on the steering wheel. If you do not press any other button, menu bar ④ fades out after a few seconds. Text field ③ shows the selected menu or sub-menu as well as display messages.
i Set the time using the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.
Possible displays in the multifunction display:
Press and hold the button on the steel ing wheel until the trip menu with trip odometer ① and odometer ② appears.
• ↑ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (▶ page 136)
• P Parking Pilot (▷ page 177)
• CRUISE Cruise control (▷ page 157)
• Adaptive Highbeam Assist (▷ page 108)
• A ECO start/stop function (▷ page 129)
• HOLD HOLD function (▷ page 167)
• Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilc (▷ page 214)
• DSR Downhill Speed Regulation (▷ page 168)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to call up the menu bar and select a Operating the on-board computer page 207).
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
- Trip menu (▷ page 209)
- Navi menu (navigation instructions) (▷ page 210)
• Audio menu (▷ page 211) - Tel menu (telephone) (▷ page 212)
- DriveAssist menu (assistance) (▷ page 213)
- Serv. menu (▷ page 213)
- Sett. menu (settings) (▷ page 215)
- AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (▷ page 218)
Trip menu
Standard display
bar
| Value | Label | |---|---| | 123.0 | ① | | 26753 | ② | P54.33-3479-31Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"
text_image
From Start 150 mi 1:30 h 31.6 mpg 60 mph 4 2 3 P54.33-3568-31① Distance
② Driving time
③ Average speed
④ Average fuel consumption
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the trp menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select From start or From reset.
The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Res submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (▶ page 210).
The From Starttrip computer is automatically reset if:
- the ignition has been switched off for more than four hours.
• 999 hours have been exceeded.
• 9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
ECO display
The ECO display is not available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the trp menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select ECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see (▷ page 149).
Displaying the range and current fuel trip computer, the values in the ECO display are consumption also reset.
text_image
Range 185 mi Consumption ① ② mag 0 20 40 60 Charge Max ③ PS4.33-3567-31Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays approximate range ①.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
Digital speedometer
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the digital speedometer.
A gear shift recommendation can also appear.
Observe the information on gearshift recommendation ↑ when shifting manually (▷ page 136).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display and not in the digital speedometer display.
Resetting values
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the function that you wish to reset.
▶ Press OK to confirm your selection.
▶ Press ▼ to select Yes and press OK to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following functions:
- Trip odometer
- "From Start" trip computer
- "From Reset" trip computer
- ECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions.
Observe the additional information on navigation in the separate multimedia system operating instructions.
▶ Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
text_image
Direction of Travel ①—NE ② MERCEDES DRIVE P54-33-3485-31① Direction of travel
② Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
flowchart
graph TD
A["①"] -->|181 mi| B["④"]
B --> C["③"]
C --> D["MERCEDES DRIVE"]
B -->|3 mi| E["②"]
① Distance to destination
② Distance to the next change of direction
③ Current road
④ "Follow the road's course" symbol
Change of direction announced withoutOther status indicators of the navigation recommendation tion system
text_image
Benz Drive ① ③ → I 900 ft ② P54.33-3488-31① Road into which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol ③ for the change of direction and distance graphic ②. The distance indicatorThe vehicle position is inside the area of the shortens towards the top of the display as you digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. approach the point of the announced change of newly built streets, car parks or private land. direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero.
Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation
text_image
BENZ DRIVE 0.4 mi P54 33-3489-31① Road into which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ Lanes not recommended
④ Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction
⑤ Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction ^1 the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended ③: you will not be to complete the next change of direction if stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ④: in this lane you will able to complete the next two changes of dition without changing lane.
text_image
Direction of Destination Destination Area P54.33-3486-31The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:
- New Route... or Calculating Route...
A new route is calculated.
Road Not Mapped
- No Route
No route could be calculated to the selected destination.
•
You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
text_image
FM 1:97.1 Mhz P54.33-3490-31① Active station list
② Station frequency with memory position
The multifunction display shows station ② with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ② if this has been stored. You can store TV channels ② in the multimedia system.
▶ Switch on the multimedia system and select radio; see the separate operating instructions.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Aud menu.
▶ To select a preset list or station list: Video DVD operation
and briefly hold the ▲ or ▼ button up the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown in the multifunction display.
▶ To select a station: briefly press ▲ or ▼.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio.
For more information on radio operation, "Satellite radio" in the separate operating instructions.
Operating an audio player or audio media
text_image
DISC 02 Track 3 P54.33-3576-31
text_image
DSC 02 Scene 1 P54.33-3577-31▶ Switch on the multimedia system and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Aud menu.
▶ To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button until desired scene ① has been reached.
Telephone menu
Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.
▶ Switch on the multimedia system and select audio CD or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steer wheel to select the Audiumenu.
▶ To select the next/previous track: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a track from the track list (risitation permits. If you are not sure that this scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ is possible, park the vehicle paying attention button until desired track ① has been reached.
If you press and hold ▲ or ▼, the rapid
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio When telephoning, you must observe the legal drives or data carriers support this function requirements for the country in which you are
If track information is stored on the audio device currently driving.
or medium, the multifunction display will show▶ Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
▶ Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions).
▶ Establish a Bluetooth connection to the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the menu.
You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the number you want to dial.
- Phone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network work and is ready to receive.
▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to start diali
- Phone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.
▶ To exit the telephone book: press the or ← button.
Redialing
Accepting a call
The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
If someone calls you when you are in the Te menu, a display message appears in the mult function display.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the menu.
You can accept a call at any time regardless the menu selected.
▶ Press the 📞 button to switch to the 📞 redi
▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering to accept an incoming call.
omemory.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the whesired name or number.
▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to start diali or
▶ To exit the redial memory: press the or in button.
Rejecting or ending a call
You can end or reject a call even if you are the Ted1menu.
wheel.
Assistance menu
▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering to reject or end a call.
Introduction
Selecting an entry from the telephone book
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steel wheel to select the menu.
DriveAssist menu:
▶ Press the ▲, ▼ or OK button to switch to the phone book.
- Displaying the assistance graphic (▷ page 214)
▶ Authorize access to the phone book on the phone.
- Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot (▷ page 214)
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired name.
- Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist e (▷ page 214)
or
- Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function▶(page 214)
▶ To start rapid scrolling: press and hold ▲ or ▼ button for longer than one s ond.
theActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST ec(> page 214)
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.
- Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist> (page 214)
- Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
If only one telephone number is stored a name: press the 📞 or OK button start dialing.
I for Active Lane Keeping Assist (page 215) n to
or
▶ If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 📄 or OK button to display the numbers.
Displaying the assistance graphic
text_image
2014 0m 0m P54.33-3721-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select Assistance Graphic.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display shows the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assistance graphic display.
The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems:
• Traffic Sign Assist (▷ page 190)
• Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (▷ page 159)
• Active Brake Assist (▷ page 62)
• Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function ( page 67)
• ATTENTION ASSIST (▷ page 189)
- Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 193) or Active Lane Keeping Assist▶(page 197)
- DSR (▷ page 168)
▶ Press ▼ to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment.
Activating/deactivating Steering Pilot
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select Steering Pilot.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
The current selection appears.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
When the Steering Pilot is activated, the multifunction display displays SaestengPilot On message.
Further information about Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot>page 165).
Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist
You can use these functions to activate/deactivate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package, to activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Brake Assist.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The current selection appears.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
When Active Brake Assist or Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist (▷ page 62) and Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function ▷ (page 67).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select
ST Attention Assist.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection appears.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set Off, Standard or Sensitive.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see ▷(page 189).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Blind Spot Assist.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
The current selection appears.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see ( page 191). vehicle, In the eset menu you have the following options:
For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see ▷(page 194).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssi menu. • Restoring the factory settings (▷ page 217)
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Lane Keeping Assist.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The current selection appears.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set Off, Standard or Adaptive.
• Restoring the factory settings (▷ page 217)
The Display Unit Speedometer / Odometer: function allows you to choose whether
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display.
When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see ▷(page 193).
For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see▶(page 197).
Service menu
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu:
- Calling up display messages in message memory (> page 221)
- Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ( page 328) or checking the tire pressure electronically ( page 330)
- Calling up the service due date (▷ page 298)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, In the eSet menu you have the following options:
• Changing the instrument cluster settings (▷ page 215)
- Changing the light settings (▷ page 216)
- Changing the vehicle settings (▷ page 216)
- Changing the convenience settings (▷ page 217)
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting the distance unit
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the set menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Display Unit Speedometer / Odometer ep-function.
You will see the selected setting or limitless.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to:
• Digital speedometer in the trip menu
• Odometer and the trip odometer
- Trip computer
- Current consumption and the range
• Navigation instructions in the NaWavi menu
- Cruise control
• Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
• ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed.
The speed display is inverse to the speedome• Highway mode ter. • Active light fur
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering cornering light function wheel to select the Set menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. Further information on the Intelligent Light System ( page 106).
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Permanent Display: function. The current setting, Qustisid Temperature Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer [mph] appears.
▶ To change the setting: press OK again
Light submenu
Setting the daytime running lamps
This function is not available in Canada.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Set menu.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Automatic Door Lock function.
- Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the When the Automatic Door Lock function is Light submenu.
- Press OK to confirm. activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Daytime ▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. Running Lights function. For further information on the automatic locking If the Daytime Running Lights function has feature, see ▷(page 78). been switched on, the cone of light and the symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. If you switch on the AcoustockLock function, an Further information on daytime running lamps (▷ page 104). acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Automatic Door Lock function.
When the AutomaticDoorLock function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
For further information on the automatic locking feature, see ▷(page 78).
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle.
Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering vehicle submenu. wheel to select the Set menu. ▶ Press OK to co
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the ▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Light submenu. Acoustic Lock function.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the the 🔒 symbol in the multifunction display
Intell. Light System function. lights up orange.
If the Intell Light System function has ▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. been switched on, the cone of light and the symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
eringhicle submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Acoustic Lock function.
If the A Acoustic Look function is activated,
the 🔒 symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange.
Press the OK button to save the setting.
When you activate In bedell.1 Light System
you activate the following functions:
Vehicle submenu
Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism
If you activate the Amboriat DooDooock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Set menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Vehicle submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the
Convenience submenu
Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- press one of the memory function position buttons, or
- move the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
For further information on belt adjustment, (▷ page 43).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when loo ing feature on/off
This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you activate the AutMirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the set menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Convenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the AAtto.MMiroorF6ddingfunction is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Set menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Convenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Using ▼ or ▲, select the Easy Entry/Exit function.
If the EasyEntry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▶ page 98).
text_image
Car interior photo with visible car door, control panel, and digital device icon labeled '1'If you have switched the AutMirMorrFolding on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using button ①, they will not fold out automatically (off page 100).
Switching the seat belt adjustment on
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering can then only fold out the exterior mirrors wheel to select the Setting menu. using button ①.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Convenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Belt Adjustment function.
eYing can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button ①.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Set menu.
If the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Restoring the factory settings
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Factory Setting submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The Reset AIT Settings? message appears.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select NoSETUP Yes.
▶ Press OK to confirm the selection. If you select Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.
If you want to reset the Dayt ihen Running Lights function in the light submenu, you must turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the tion lock.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up
text_image
2 Up 1 23 mph 183 °F 208 °F 179 °F ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P54.23-3773-31① Digital speedometer
② Gear indicator
③ Upshift indicator
④ Engine oil temperature
⑤ Coolant temperature
⑥ Transmission oil temperature
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator ③ indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program.
Engine/transmission oil temperature:
when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ④ and ⑥ are displayed in white in the multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ④ or ⑥ in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.
text_image
2 23 mph Sport Comfort M Off P54.23-3771-31① Engine mode (Comfort/Sport/Sport +)
② Suspension setting Comfort/Sport/Sport +
③ Transmission positionDDYM
④ ESP ^® mode (ON/OFF)
SETUP displays the following information/functions:
• the digital speedometer
• the gear indicator
- the engine mode
• the suspension mode
• the transmission position
- the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the A menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads.
text_image
2 23 mph 1 L1 00:00:00 2 Start P54.33-3769-31① Lap
② RACETIMER
You can start the RACETIMER when the engine press the ← button on the steering wheel running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the Confirm Yes with OK. ignition lock. The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop me
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the ste wheel to select the menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown.
▶ To start: press the OK button to start RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
text_image
2 23 mph L1 00:14:71 Interm. Time New Lap P54.33-3767-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select
Interm. Time.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds.
Starting a new lap
text_image
3 60 min L2 00:11 90 BL 00:11 60 Interm. Time New Lap P54.33-3511-31① RACETIMER
② Fastest lap time (best lap)
③ Lap
▶ Press OK to confirm NewLapap.
It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed by Finish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
text_image
Stop Race-Timer? No Yes P64.33-3512-31The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to position 3 and then press OK to confirm Start, timing is continued.
The Resetting the current lap
▶ Stop the RACETIMER.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select Reset Lap.
▶ Press OK to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
text_image
Reset Race-Timer? No Yes P64.33-3515-31If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset.
▶ Reset the current lap.
▶ Press OK to confirmeReset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the ▼ button to select Yes and press the OK button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
text_image
① RT 01:01:53 on ② ⑤ 65 mph ø 60 mph ③ ④ 61 miles P54.33-3519-31① RACETIMER overall evaluation
② Total time driven
③ Average speed
④ Distance covered
⑤ Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering Top speed during lap wheel to select the AMenu. This function is only a
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown.
e@ngTop speed during lap
Lap statistics
text_image
①—L1 13:00:09—② ⑤—65 mph ø 60 mph—③ ④—13 miles P54.23-3514-31① Lap
② Lap time
East Average lap speed
④ Lap length
This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-TIMER.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the A menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol ①.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a different lap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
• HOLD function (▷ page 167)
- Parking (▷ page 145)
Hiding display messages
▶ Press the OK or ← button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call the display messages:
X Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
X Press OK to confirm.
x Press the ▲ or ▼ button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
| Safety systems | |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ES(Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.In addition, the [IMAGE], [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.Possible causes are:Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.The on-board voltage may be insufficient.WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
  Inoperative See Operator's Manual | ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.The [BRAKE (USA only) or [I] (Canada only), [IMAGE], [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up. WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | ESP®is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.In addition, the [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP®is not operational, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| Inoperative See Operator's Manual | ESP®is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.In addition, the [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP®is not operational, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions | |
  Inoperative See Operator's Manual | EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.In addition, the [IMAGE], [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
  (Canada only)Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake | The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off.► SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.► KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. | |
  (Canada only)Please Release Parking Brake | The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (▶ page 146).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.► Release the electric parking brake manually. | |
| The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (▶ page 146). | ||
  (Canada only)Parking Brake See Operator's Manual | The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:► Switch the ignition off.► Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.► Shift the transmission to position P.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The yellow (P) warning lamp and the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:► Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.► Release the electric parking brake manually.or► Release the electric parking brake automatically (▷ page 146).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:► Do not drive on.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | ||
| The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow (P) warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:► Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.► Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:► Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.► Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash:► Do not drive on.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 342).► Shift the transmission to position P.► Turn the front wheels towards the curb.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | ||
| The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.► Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.► Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:► Shift the transmission to position P.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:► Release the electric parking brake automatically (▷ page 146).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | ||
| The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.► Shift the transmission to position P.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | ||
| PARK (USA only) (P) (Canada only) Parking Brake Inoperative | The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.► Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.► Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:► Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.► Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up and the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.▶ Shift the transmission to position P.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
 (USAlony) (Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel | There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the BRAKE (USA only) or (I) (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. | |
 Check Brake Pad Wear | The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USA only: the BRAKE red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
 Inoperative | One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual | Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiationthe system is outside the operating temperature rangethe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Active Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Restart the engine. | |
| Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual | Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
| PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual | Important functions of PRE-SAFE have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
| Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual | Active Brake Assist or PRE-SAFE PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP is deactivated the system is outside the operating temperature range the on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Active Brake Assist or PRE-SAFE PLUS is operative again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145). Restart the engine. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP on again (▷ page 65). | |
| Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual | Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE-SAFE® PLUS is not available due to a malfunction. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
| Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual | The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.Possible causes are: ·Dirt on sensors·Heavy rain or snow·When driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areasAt least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable:·PRE-SAFE® PLUS·Active Brake Assist·Active Lane Keeping Assist·Active Blind Spot Assist·Distance Pilot DISTRONICIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application.A warning tone also sounds.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears.If the display message does not disappear:► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).► Switch off the engine.► Clean all sensors (▷ page 303).► Restart the engine.The display message disappears. | |
| SRS Malfunction Service Required | The restraint system is malfunctioning.TheWARNINGlight also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be to unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see (▷ page 39). | |
| Front Left Malfunction Service RequiredorFront Right Malfunction Service Required | The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.TheWARNINGlight also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be to unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
 Rear Left Malfunc-tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required | The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.[OSSZW]WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
 Rear Center Malfunc-tion ServiceRequired | The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
 Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain AirbagMalfunction ServiceRequired | The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.[ZWZY]WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
| Front Passenger Air-bag Disabled See Operator's Manual | The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey, even though:an adultora person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Switch the ignition off.Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six secondsthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag- page 47)the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction displayWait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (▷ page 47). | |
| Front Passenger Air-bag Enabled See Operator's Manual | The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even though:·a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or·the front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.⚠ WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).► Switch the ignition off.► Open the front-passenger door.► Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.► Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.► Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.► Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:·a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds·the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (▷ page 47)·the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display► Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.► Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (▷ page 47). | |
Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Check Left Low Beam(Example) | The bulb in question is malfunctioning.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.or▶ Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (▷ page 109). |
 Active Headlamps Inoperative | The active light function is faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Malfunction See Operator's Manual | The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Check the fuses (▷ page 318).▶ If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes. If the multifunction display still shows the display message:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
 Malfunction See Operator's Manual | The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Auto Lamp Function Inoperative | The light sensor is defective.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Switch Off Lights | You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position. |
| Switch On Headlamps | You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. ▶ Turn the light switch to the ☑ or AUTO position. |
| Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: • the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty • visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog ▶ Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. |
| Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative | Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Engine
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Manual | The coolant level is too low.⚠ Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.▶ Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (▷ page 297).If you have to add coolant frequently:▶ Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked. |
 | The fan motor is malfunctioning.▶ At coolant temperatures below 248 °F (120 °C), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▶ Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. |
 Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off | The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.▶ Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 °F (120 °C). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.▶ Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.If the temperature increases again:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 °F (120 °C). |
| See Operator's Manual | The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:a defective alternatora torn poly-V-belta malfunction in the electronics⚠ Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual | The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Observe the instructions in the [→See Operator's Manual display message.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling | The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.▶ Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (▷ page 296).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 296).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:▶ Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. |
 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) | Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.⚠ Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.▶ Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (▷ page 296).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 296).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:▶ Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercdes-benz.com. |
 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off | Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.There is a risk of engine damage.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Check the engine oil level (▷ page 296).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 296). |
 Fuel Level Low | The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station.There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. |
 Gas Cap Loose | The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.▶ Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:▶ Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Ultra Low-sulfurDiesel Fuel Only | Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station.▶ Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm sulfur MAXIMUM). |
 Replace Air Filter | Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Fuel Filter | Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Additive SeeOperator's Manual | The DEF tank is almost empty.▶ Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop (▷ page 142). |
 Remaining Starts: 166 | The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a further 16 times.▶ Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop (▷ page 142).i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (▷ page 142). |
| Driving systems | |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Attention Assist:Take a Break! | Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds.► If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. |
 Attention Assist Inoperative | ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Drive More Slowly | You cannot change the vehicle level.Possible causes are:you are driving too fast for the selected vehicle levelyou are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rackDrive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again (▷ page 171).Observe the notes on towing a trailer (▷ page 200). |
 Compressor Is Cool-ing | You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs to cool down because of frequent level changes.Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.Allow the compressor to cool down.When the compressor has cooled down, the display message disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level. |
 Malfunction | AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM Malfunction | The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM Malfunction See Operator's Manual | The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also soundWARNINGThere is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully.Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.Avoid sudden acceleration around tight corners and fast steer movements.Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
 Inoperative | DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogClean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. |
| Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative | Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Off | The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.Reactivate the HOLD function later (▶ page 167). |
| Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's ManualorActive Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Clean the windshield. |
| Lane Keeping Assist InoperativeorActive Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative | Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's ManualorActive Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature rangethe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiationThe yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Restart the engine. |
| Blind Spot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's ManualorAct. Blind Spot Asst. Not Available When Tow-ing a Trailer See Operator's Manual | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer.You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle.Press OK on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. |
| Blind Spot Assist inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. The yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Parking Pilot Canceled | The driver's door is open. ▶ Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed. |
| You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. ▶ While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. | |
| The vehicle has started to skid and®H&R intervened. ▶ Use Parking Pilot again later (▷ page 177). | |
| Parking Pilot Inoperative | PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is malfunctioning or faulty. ▶ Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC Parking Assist" section>page 177). If the multifunction display still shows the display message: ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Parking Pilot is unavailable or malfunctioning. ▶ Switch off the ignition and restart the engine. If the Parking Pilot continues to be unavailable (the P symbol does not appear in the multifunction display): ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| Parking Pilot Fin-ished | The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. |
| Distance Pilot off | Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Distance Pilot has deactivated automatically (▷ page 159). |
| Distance Pilot available again | Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (▷ page 159). |
| Distance Pilot Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative. Steering Pilot is also temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation the system is outside the operating temperature range the on-board voltage is too low A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145). Restart the engine. |
| Distance Pilot inoperative | Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. The following may have also failed: Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function A warning tone also sounds. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Distance Pilot Suspended | You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. |
| Distance Pilot - - - mph | A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met. Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (▷ page 159). |
| Steering Pilot Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual | Steering Pilot is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Steering Pilot is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Clean the windshield. |
| Steering Pilot inoperative | Steering Pilot is malfunctioning.However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Cruise control inoperative | Cruise control is malfunctioning.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Cruise control --- mph | A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.ESP®is deactivated. The yellow ESP®OFF warning lamp is lit.If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.orCheck the activation conditions for cruise control (▷ page 157).orReactivate ESP®(▷ page 65). |
| Cruise Control Off | Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (▷ page 157). |
| Tires | |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Check Tire Pressure Soon | The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:you have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires.the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantlyWARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 306).Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct(▷ page 328). |
| Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator | The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (▷ page 328). |
| Run Flat Indicator Inoperative | The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Please Correct Tire Pressure | The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (▷ page 328).If necessary, correct the tire pressure.Restart the tire pressure monitor (▷ page 330). |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Check Tires | The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braki maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 306).Check the tire pressure (▷ page 328).If necessary, correct the tire pressure. |
| Warning Tire Mal-function | The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.⚠ WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.you could lose control of the vehicle.continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braki maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 306). |
| Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable | Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved. |
| Tire Press. Sensor(s) Missing | There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display.Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors | The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.▶ Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. |
| Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative | The tire pressure monitor is faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Vehicle
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Shift to 'P' or "N" to Start Engine | You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. ▶ Shift the transmission to position P or N. |
| Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' | You have attempted to shift the transmission to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. |
| To Deselect P or N. Depress Brake and Start Engine | With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the transmission out of position P or N into another transmission position. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Start the engine. |
| Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away | The driver's door is open/not completely closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. ⚠ WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. ▶ Shift the transmission to position P. ▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145). ▶ Close the driver's door completely. |
| Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary | The vehicle is moving. ▶ Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ▶ Shift the transmission to position P. |
| Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer | You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: ►Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans- mission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: ►Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145). ►Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. |
| Reversing Not Possis- ble Service Required | You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction. The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. ►Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Transmission Mal- function Stop | A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo- nents. A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi- tion N. ►Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ►Shift the transmission to position P. ►Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145). ►Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. |
| Auxiliary Battery Malfunction | The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. ►Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ►Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. ►Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. |
 | The tailgate is open. ⚠ WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte- rior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. ►Close the tailgate. |
 | The hood is open. The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Close the hood. |
 | At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Close all the doors. |
 Power Steering Mal-function See Operator's Manual | The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds. You will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:▶ Do not drive on.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 p Service | Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.▶ Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. |
 Check Washer Fluid | The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶ Add washer fluid (▷ page 297). |
 alfunction- | The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Warnings Malfunc- | The hazard warning lamps are faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
SmartKey
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle | You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.▶ Use the correct SmartKey. |
 Take Your Key from Ignition | The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Remove the SmartKey. |
 Obtain a New Key | The SmartKey needs to be replaced.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Replace Key Battery | The SmartKey battery is discharged.▶ Change the battery (▷ page 74). |
 Don't Forget Your Key | The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the door with the engine switched off.A warning tone also sounds.This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 second simply a reminder.▶ Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. |
 Key Not Detected(white display message) | The SmartKey is currently undetected.▶ Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:▶ Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. |
 Key Not Detected(red display message) | The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehic trally or start the engine.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, pa attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Locate the SmartKey. |
| Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey mode. | |
 Remove 'Start' Button and Insert Key | The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty.The SmartKey is continually undetected.A warning tone also sounds.Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| ▷ After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.► Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 42). | |
| ▷ After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.► Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 42).The warning tone ceases.▷ The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 42).The warning lamp goes out.There are objects on the front-passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out. | |
| ▷ The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 m (25 km/h).▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 42).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).▶ Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. |
Safety systems
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| (1) BRAKE | ▷ BRAKE (USA only), (1) (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.► Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
| (1) BRAKE | ▷ BRAKE (USA only), (1) (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.There is a risk of an accident.► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).► Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.► Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
| BRAKE | ▷ USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The multifunction display also shows a display message with the 🔒 symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Warning/indicator lamp
▷ Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and Solutions
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the 📄 and ⚡ OFF warning lamps may light up in the instrume cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP ^ is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
Warning/indicator lamp
▷ Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and Solutions
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the 📄 and ⚡ OFF warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
- Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
- The on-board voltage may be insufficient.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
▶ Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Warning/indicator lamp
▷ Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and Solutions
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the and -o_FF warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
▶ BRAKE (USA only), (1) (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP ^ is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| ▷ The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP®or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.▶When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.▶Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.▶Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.▶Do not deactivate ESP.In rare cases ▷(page 65), it may be best to deactivate®.ESPObserve the important safety notes on ESP page 64). | |
| ▷ The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP®is deactivated.⚠ WARNINGIf ESP®is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applications.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases ▷(page 65), it may be best to deactivate®.ESPObserve the important safety notes on ESP page 64).▶Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:▶Drive on carefully.▶Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP checked. |
Warning/indicator lamp
▷ Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and Solutions
The yellow ESP and ESP OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist, ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist; Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP ^® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The yellow ESP and ESP OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP ^® , BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist, ESP ^® trailer stabilization, PRE-SAFE ^® , PRE-SAFE ^® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP ^® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
▶ Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| PARK (P) | ▷ PARK (USA only), (P) (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
▷ The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is malfunctioning. WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.For further information about the restraint system, see (▷ page 39). | |
| Engine | |
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| ▷ The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:in the engine managementin the fuel injection systemin the exhaust systemin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)in the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (▷ page 142).Start the engine three to four times after refueling.If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. | |
 | ▷ The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Refuel at the nearest gas station. |
 | ▷ The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, theCheck Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 | ▷ The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstancesSecure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
Warning/indicator lamp
▷ Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and Solutions
The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).
▶ Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
▶ Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 297).
▶ If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow slush or ice.
▶ Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 °F (120 °C). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 °F (120 °C). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).
▶ Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
▶ Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 297).
▶ If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow slush or ice.
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| ▷ At coolant temperatures below 248 °F (120 °C), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▷ Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous ter and stop-and-go traffic. | |
| Driving systems | |
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| ▷ The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. Awar tone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your fine travel at too high a speed.▷ Be prepared to brake immediately.▷ Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRON#page 159).Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist (▷ page 62). | |
| Tires | |
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and Solutions |
| ▷ The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tir(x277)WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 306).Check the tire pressure (▷ page 328).If necessary, correct the tire pressure. | |
| ▷ The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.(CT7H)WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose contro of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident
Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for country in which you are currently driving who operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following in account, for example:
- traffic lights
- stop and yield signs
- parking or stopping restrictions
- road narrowing
- other road and traffic rules and regulations If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is ren-igation recommendations if the actual street/dered invalid.
traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data.
For example:
- a diverted route
- the road layout or the direction of a one-w street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended installed at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs).
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect.
Operating system
Overview
General notes
Do not use the space in front of the disp
for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result impairments to the display, which could be irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely.
Cleaning instructions
Do not touch the display. The display has very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when T cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display.
Switching the multimedia system on/off
▶ Press
control knob.
Adjusting the volume
▶ Turn the
control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
• for the currently selected media source
• during traffic or navigation announcements
• in hands-free mode during a phone call
Switching the sound on or off
Press the button on the control panel of the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the symbol. If you s
the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on.
Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following functions:
in Radio mode
• Media mode with media search
- Sound systems
- Navigation system
COMAND: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card
• Communication functions
• SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
• Vehicle functions with system settings
- Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
- select menu items on the display
- enter characters
- select a destination on the map
- save entries
The controller can be:
m·turned [◎]
- slid left or right
- slid forwards or back ↑◎↓
- slid diagonally
- pressed briefly or pressed and held
Back button
You can use the ← button to exit a menu or call up the basic display of the current operating mode.
To exit the menu: briefly press the button.
The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.
To call up the basic display: press the button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
▶ To call up: press the ☐ * button on the controller.
▶ Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
▶ To exit: press the ☐ * button again.
Adding favorites
Adding a predefined favorite
text_image
Medium On Use Phone Book Sound Off ① Reassign Rename Move Delete ② ③ ④ PB2.89-0140-31① Adds a new favorite
② Renames a selected favorite
③ Moves a selected favorite
④ Deletes a selected favorite
▶ Press the * button.
▶ Slide Ⓞ↓ the controller. The menu bar is shown.
▶ Select Reassign. The categories are displayed.
▶ Select a category. The favorites are displayed.
▶ Select a favorite.
▶ Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added position, it will be overwritten.
Adding your own favorite
▶ Select Vehicle → Climate Control.
▶ Press and hold the ☐ button until the favorites are displayed.
▶ Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added position, it will be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving operating the navigation system.
wl
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide.
The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting a route type and route options
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Navi → Navigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
▶ Slide Ⓞ↓ the controller.
▶ Select Options → Route Settings.
Notes for route types:
- Eco Route
• Dynamic Traffic Route
Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in all countries).
• Dynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traffic.
reports should be included in the route cal-
culation (not available in all countries).
• Calculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In order
to do so, instead of a Star select the menu item Continue
▶ To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options.
▶ Select a route option.
Notes for route options:
- Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
• Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated.
the corresponding digits are displayed with an
▶ Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
er search for a keyword
The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words.
• select the last destination
- select a contact
- select a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number.
- select destination on the map
• enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations.
- select destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps
- select geo-coordinates
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Mavi → Navigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position
▶ Slide Ⓞ↓ the controller.
▶ Select Destination → Address Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
- city or ZIP code, street, house number
• state/province, city or ZIP code
- city or ZIP code, center
• street, city or ZIP code, intersection
▶ Select City.
The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out.
▶ Enter the city.
The symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times.
▶ To switch to the list: slide the ↑◎ control Connecting a mobile phone ler.
▶ Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location,For telephony via the BluetoothInterface, you
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu.
n. Select Start or Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.
▶ Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or Set as Intermediate Destination.
Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate Destination adds
the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list.
Connecting a mobile phone
Prerequisites
For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you require a Bluetooth capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above.
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Vehicle → System Settings → Activate Bluetooth.
▶ Activate Bluetooth® √.
Mobile phone:
▶ Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect:
- Phone book
- Call lists
• Text messages and e-mail
i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the mult-media system for the first time, you will need
search for the phone and then authorize (con- The process is canceled.
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authoRepeat authorization.
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
▶ Select TieT// → Connect Device → Search for Phones → Start Search.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
| Symbol | Explanation |
| New mobile phone found, not ye authorized. | |
| Mobile phone is authorized, but i not connected | |
| Mobile phone is authorized and connected |
Connecting a mobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
▶ Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
▶ If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system.
▶ Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If the codes are different: select No on the d multimedia system.
n- The process is canceled.
thoRepeat authorization.
Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):
▶ Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile on phone.
- The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
▶ Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey.
▶ Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
▶ Press ok to confirm.
▶ Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth Inserting/removing an SD card
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the ma ufacturer's operating instructions).
important safety notes
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones.
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Connect Device.
▶ Select a mobile phone from the device list.
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources, default display must already be turned on. ther information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Re
The following external media sources can be used:
- Apple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
- USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) (▷ page 268)
• CD - DVD (COMAND)
- SD cards
• via devices connected by Bluetooth®
i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Using the device list
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Media → Devices. The available media sources will be shown. The • dot indicates the current setting.
▶ Select the media source. Playable files are played.
Removing an SD card
▶ Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
▶ Remove the SD card.
Connecting USB devices
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a magnified inset showing two blue arrows pointing to the next component (no text or symbols visible)There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest.
▶ Connect the USB device to the USB port.
▶ Select the media source (▷ page 268).
CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks (Rear Seat Entertainment System)
text_image
① ⑤ ④ ③ ② P82.87-2053-31① Disc slot
② AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal (red)
③ AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal (white)
④ AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
⑤ Disc eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive. Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX display).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit veh occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgas is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could be yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them.
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo.
Do not exceed the load limit or permitted gro vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle. The gross load limit and the GVWR are speci on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pil of the driver's door>page 331).
The load must also be distributed so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and r axles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR
are on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door page 331).
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (▷ page 331).
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load:
Never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
- The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects.
- Position heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the cargo compartment as possible.
- The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
Always place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place.
• Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
- Use the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage.
- Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.
- Secure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection.
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction. ear
• Always stow objects in such a way that the cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.
• Always make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
- Ensure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey.
• Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines page 270).
Glove box
text_image
Car dashboard interface screenshot with numbered UI elements and a blue circular component labeled '1' and '2'▶ To open: pull handle ① and open glove box flap ②.
▶ To close: fold glove box flap ② upwards until it engages.
i The glove box can be cooled and ventilated (▷ page 123).
text_image
1 2 80.00-2225-311 Glove box unlocked
2 Glove box locked
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.
natural_image
Close-up of a car air conditioner unit with a dial indicator (no visible text or symbols)Partition ① for stowing flat objects is located in the upper section of the glove box. It can be removed to increase the stowage space in the glove box.
▶ To remove: pull out partition ①
▶ To install: insert partition ① and push it back until it engages.
Stowage compartment under the arm rest
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with blue directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)Vehicles without touchpad
▶ To open: pull handle ① up. The armrest folds out.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled parts (① and ②), showing no readable text or symbols beyond labels.
Vehicles with touchpad and COMAND
▶ To open: press button ① at the front. Armrest ② folds out.
▶ To open: slide cover ① forwards.
Stowage compartment ② appears.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as it will go.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a multi-media connector unit with 2 USB ports (Medi Interface), e.g. for use with an ^® iPhone or MP3 player is installed in the stowage compa ment.
There is a removable stowage tray in the storage compartment, in which objects such as an iPod can be stored.
Eyeglasses compartment
text_image
① ② P68.00-7473-31▶ To open: press marking ①. Eyeglasses compartment ② opens down.
▶ To close: press marking ① again and eye-glasses compartment ② moves up and engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the front ter console
text_image
Car infotainment diagram with numbered components and a blue arrow indicating direction\$stowage compartment in the rear center console
text_image
1 P68.00-7475-31▶ To open: briefly press the stowage compartment marking. Stowage compartment ① opens.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be open stowage spaces above and below the stowage compartment.
Additional stowage space
WARNING
Vehicles with the Occupant Classification System (OCS):
If the gross weight of the objects in the stow-age net on the back of the front-passenger seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannot correctly assess the occupant's weight category. The front-passenger front air bag could deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always observe the permissible gross weight of 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects in the cargo compartment.
Depending on the equipment, the following additional stowage areas are available in the vehicle:
R stowage net in front-passenger footwell
R the map pockets on the back of the driver's and front-passenger seat
R parcel nets on the right-hand side of the cargo compartment
R folding coat hooks next to the grab handles in the rear
Observe the loading guidelines (page 270) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (page 270).
text_image
② ③ P68.00-7477-31Push cover ③ forward until it is lying on rear seat armrest.
Through-loading facility in the rear
If objects or loads are not secured when being transported in the through-loading facility, they could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.
Observe the loading guidelines (page 270) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (page 270).
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front panel with a highlighted key and blue arrow indicator (no text or symbols)The through-loading facility is opened from the cargo compartment.
▶ Fold down the rear seat armrest.
▶ Pull the center head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position (▷ page 93).
▶ Slide release catch ① to the left and swing flap ② to the left until it is lying on the re side of the rear bench seat.
Cargo compartment enlargement
important safety notes
WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident.
R The vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.
R Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged.
Make sure that the seat backrest and the seat cushion are correctly engaged in position. To do so pull firmly on the seat backrest.
! Fold the seat cushion upwards before folding the rear bench seat forward. Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged.
When the backrest is folded forwards, the front seats should not be moved to their rearmost position. Otherwise, the front seats and the rear bench seat could be damaged.
! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care when folding it down. Make sure that the head restraints are pushed all the way in so that the backrests and seat cushions are not damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines page 270).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
text_image
e head t the sts ① ② P9143-3639-31Folding the rear bench seat forwards
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a seat with blue directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)If the driver's or front-passenger seat is set for a larger person, it may not be possible to fold the rear bench seat forward. In this case, move the front seats as far forward as possible.
▶ Fold down the outer head restraints and mo the center head restraint to the lowest position ( page 94).
▶ Fold seat cushion ① up.
text_image
Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt and seat, with numbered arrows indicating direction of movement or rotation.- Pull release handle ② up in the direction of The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a the arrow until backrest ① is fully released. load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether - Fold backrest ① forward until it reaches the anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could cargo compartment position. be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes
▶ Guide seat belts ② under respective clips ①.
Folding the rear bench seat back
text_image
for a the the ① ② P91-12-3725-31Fold seat backrest ① back until it engages. Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doing so.
▶ Swing seat cushion ② back.
▶ Readjust the head restraint if necessary (▷ page 94).
▶ Readjust the head restraint if necessary. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
WARNING
ofThe Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a d.load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes in direction or in the event of an accident. The load could slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury.
Only use the cargo tie down rings when securing a load.
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
- Secure the load using the cargo tie-down rings.
- Distribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly.
- Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. There is one bag hook on either side of the cargo compartment.
- Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges corners.
- Pad sharp edges for protection.
There is one bag hook on either side of the carg compartment.
▶Press bag hook marking ①.
▶ Turn bag hook ① until it engages.
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical knob or dial with a numbered marker (1) on the central dial, no visible text or symbols beyond the number.There are four cargo tie-down rings ① in the cargo compartment.
Bag hook
WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior with a circular inset highlighting a door panel (no text or symbols visible)Parcel shelf
! The maximum load which may be placed the parcel shelf is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
text_image
Diagram of a car rearview with numbered components and blue directional arrows indicating movement or flow.▶ To remove: pull parcel shelf ① in the direction of arrow ②.
▶ Fold parcel shelf ① up.
▶ To install: insert parcel shelf ① and slide backwards until it engages.
Observe the direction information on the label with an arrow and the message "FRONT" on the underside of the parcel shelf.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load.
Coat hooks on the tailgate
natural_image
Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and numbered component (no visible text or symbols)① Coat hook
▶ To open: holding the ribbing, press handle ① down ②. Handle ① folds up.
▶ Use handle ① to swing the cargo compartment floor upwards and hold up.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front wheel with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)▶ Pull rod ③ from the bracket on the underside and turn it as far as it will go.
Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey.
The TIREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment.
Opening/closing the cargo compartment floor
text_image
Close-up of a car's door panel with numbered annotations highlighting a blue arrow pointing to a key component.
text_image
③ ④ P48.00-7483-31▶ Set rod ③ in the corner of cargo compartment floor ④.
▶ To close: remove rod ③ from the corner of the cargo compartment floor.
▶ Secure rod ③ to the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor.
▶ Fold the cargo compartment floor down.
▶ Press the cargo compartment floor down until it engages.
Locking/unlocking the cargo compartment floor
text_image
1 0 21 Cargo compartment floor unlocked
2 Cargo compartment floor locked
The cargo compartment floor can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you ca
- raise the sliding sunroof fully
- open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully
- open the tailgate fully
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (▷ page 358).
-An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side profile with a magnified inset showing a key inserted into the dashboard area (no text or symbols visible)▶ Open covers ① carefully in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Fold covers ① upwards.
▶ Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorate points under covers ①.
▶ Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction.
• Always stow objects in such a way that the cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.
• Always make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
- Ensure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey.
• Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines\$>page 270).
! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem The temperature-controlled cup holder can be perature-controlled cup holder (page 278). used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be rec ognized. ▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
The stowage compartments in the doors providelock.
space for bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l).
The bottles are not secured or prevented from tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open drink containers in the stowage compartments.
Cup holder in the front-compartment center console
text_image
Car interior diagram showing two car compartments with numbered arrows indicating directional movement or flow, likely from a vehicle or diagnostic tool.① Cover
② Cup holder
▶To open: slide cover ① to its foremost position.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as it will go.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Temperature-controlled cup holder in the front-compartment center console
text_image
Diagram of car gear and dashboard components with numbered labels pointing to specific parts① Cup holder
② Residual heat indicator lamp
③ Switch
The temperature-controlled cup holder can be used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks warm.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
▶ To switch on the cooling function: press and hold button ③ until the blue indicator lamp on the button lights up.
To switch on the heating function: press and hold button ③ until the red indicator lamp on the button lights up.
▶ To switch off the function: press and hold button ③ until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.
When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain temperature is reached, residual heat indicator lamp ② lights up. This means that the metal insert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder metal insert.
Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest⑤ Vanity mirror
! Do not sit on or support your body weight ^6 on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. Vani
⑥ Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a numbered dial (1) and seat, no visible text or symbols▶ Fold down the rear seat armrest. Cup holder ① is located in the rear seat arm rest.
Mirror light ① only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ③ and mirror cover ⑥ has been folded up.
Glare from the side
text_image
① ② ③ arm-Sun visors
Overview
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.
▶ Fold down sun visor ①.
▶ Pull sun visor ① out of retainer ③.
▶ Swing sun visor ① to the side.
▶ Slide sun visor ① horizontally as required.
fold fold down additional sun visor ② to the wind- old behield.
text_image
Diagram of car interior with numbered components and a blue directional arrow indicating traffic flow or signal direction.① Mirror light
② Additional sun visor
③ Bracket
④ Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The holder under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder could be damaged.
text_image
Diagram of car air traffic flow with numbered directional arrows indicating movement paths▶ To open: slide cover ① to its foremost position.
▶ Fold cover ③ of the insert upwards.
▶ To remove the insert: push insert ③ to left ④.
Insert ③ slides out slightly to the right.
▶ Lift insert ③ up ② and out.
▶ To re-install the insert: place insert ③ the holder and press it down on the right it engages.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as it
- the hot cigarette lighter falls
the child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
into Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is until out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rear-compartment ashtray
! Close the ashtray when it is not in use a before you fold the rear seats forward. You can otherwise damage the ashtray.
text_image
Car interior control panel with numbered arrows indicating directional movement, showing three labeled components and blue arrows pointing to specific areas.Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment System have an ashtray in the center console in rear compartment.
▶ To open: briefly press cover ② at the top. The ashtray opens.
▶ To remove the insert: push into recess from the right.
Ashtray insert ① slides out slightly to the right.
▶ Lift insert ① up and out.
▶ To re-install the insert: place insert ① into
the holder and press down on the right un engages.
! The cigarette lighter in the center console in the front compartment is not intended for operating the tire inflation compressor.
text_image
Diagram of car gear and dashboard components with numbered parts and control buttonsYour attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.
the Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ To open: slide cover ① to its foremost position.
▶Press in cigarette lighter ②.
③Cigarette lighter ② will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as it will go.
til12 V sockets
General notes
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (> page 125).
With the exception of the socket in the front center console, all sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center console can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
Cigarette lighter
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.
include such items as chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.
Socket in the front center console
! The socket is not suitable for operating tire inflation compressor.
▶ To open: slide the cover to its foremost tion.
▶ Lift up the cover of the socket.
▶ To close: pull the cover back as far as go.
Socket in the rear compartment center console
Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment System have two sockets in the center console, the rear compartment.
▶ Lift up the cover of the socket.
Socket in the cargo compartment
text_image
12 V RICE, NO. 31▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①.
115 V socket
Important safety notes
DANGER
When a suitable device is connected, the 6h5 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connector cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
- Use only connector cables that are dry and free of damage.
- When the ignition is off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry.
Have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. - Never plug the connector cable into a 115V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
DANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Only connect appropriate devices to the power socket.
! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V power socket should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel.
General notes
The 115 V power socket provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not consume more than a maximum of 150 watts altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
- the electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in.
-
the plug of the electronic device is plugged correctly into 115 V power socket.
-
the maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts.
- the on-board power supply is within a perm sible voltage range.
- the 12 V sockets in the rear compartment the cargo compartment are operational.
Using the 115 V power socket
text_image
Diagram of car seatbelt components with numbered labels and a magnified inset showing the connector detail▶ To switch on: switch the ignition on.
▶ Open flap ③.
Insert the plug of the electronic device into 115 V power socket ①.
andicator lamp ② lights up.
▶ To switch off: disconnect the plug from 115 V power socket ①.
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
Problems with the 115 V power socket
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The warning lamp on the 115 V power socket is not lit. | The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.▶ Start the engine.or▶ Charge the battery (▷ page 313).If the indicator lamp still does not light up:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.▶ Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.▶ Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the converter:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.▶ Connect a suitable electronic device. |
mbrace
General notes
The mbrace system is only available in the You must have a license agreement to acti the mbrace service. Make sure that your syste is activated and operational. To log in, press t i MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
- it has been activated and is operational
- the corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center
- a service subscription is available
Determining the location of the vehicle on a is only possible if:
• GPS reception is available.
- the vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed follows:
▶ Press the + or - button on the mul function steering wheel.
or
▶ Use the volume control on the multimedia system.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
• Automatic and manual emergency call
• Roadside Assistance call
- MB Info call
You can find information and a description of available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. JSAmalfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs:
tem the The indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test.
• The indicator lamp in the 📄️ Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
- The indicator lamp in the 📞 i MB Info cab button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
- The indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis:
SOS button
Roadside Assistance call button
- i MB Info call button
- The Imperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
Emergency call
Important safety notes
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if:
- you see smoke inside or outside of the vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
- the vehicle is on a dangerous section of all road
- the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation (▷ page 283).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The ConnectriggC6a1 message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
All important information relating to the emergency is transferred, for example:
- current location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system)
- vehicle identification number
• information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. Breakdown
- If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency.
- If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.
- If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency.
- If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.
The 0a111 Fa#1bedmessage appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means.
Making an emergency call
text_image
Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with labeled parts and an inset magnified view of the device.▶ To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover ① briefly to open.
▶ Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second ②.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ② flashes until the emergency call is concluded.
▶ Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
▶ After the emergency call, close cover ①.
If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after
pressing SOS button ②, you do not know if
mbrace has successfully made the emergency
call. In this case, always summon assistance by
other means.
Breakdown assistance button
text_image
Car interior photo with a highlighted phone icon and numbered annotation, showing partial text and device labels.If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.
▶ To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-
To end a call: press the button on
side Assistance button ①.
multifunction steering wheel.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cys-
tomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button ① flashes while the call is active.
Connecting Ca11 message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.
▶ Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. The
If a connection can be made, the C6dm-Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:
- current location of the vehicle
- vehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (▷ page 288).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as repair current location of the vehicle work and/or towing. • vehicle identification number
You can find more information in the separate multimedia system display indicates that a embrace manual. call is active. During the call, you can change to
The system has not been able to initiate a Rb side Assistance call, if:
- the indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button 📞 is flashing continuously.
- no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone n work is not available, for example.
The Ccal11 Fai1 bed message appears in the multifunction display.
MB Info call button
text_image
1 P82 95-9061-31To call MB Info: press MB Info call button ① This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.
If a connection can be made, the1C60h-Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
If-a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:
paicurrent location of the vehicle
- vehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz.
You can find further information on the mbras system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system has not been able to initiate an Info call, if:
- the indicator lamp in MB Info call button is flashing continuously.
- no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone work is not available, for example.
The CaTT FaiTledmessage appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To end a call: press the button multifunction steering wheel.
or
▶ Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other ac calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing:
- the wheel button on the multifunction st
- the corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted.
The mobile phone is no longer connected to multimedia system.
However, if you want to use your mobile phone do so only when the vehicle is stationary and a safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access to database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi
cation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered.
▶ SelectYes by turning (◎) or sliding ←◎→ the controller and confirm with ⏻.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.
If you select the address can be stored in the address book.
The destination download function is available if:
- the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system.
- the relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package active cannot be purchased separately.
You can use the Route Assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section.
Search & Send
General notes
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destination Vehicle remote opening address
▶ Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the e field.
▶ To send the destination address to the mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the site.
Example:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address be sent to your vehicle.
▶ When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified w setting up your mbrace account into the responding field.
▶ Click "Send".
Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on website.
Calling up a transmitted destination address
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igr lock ( page 125).
The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.
▶ SelectYes by turning (◎) or sliding ←◎→ the controller and confirm with ⏻.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.
If you select the address can be stored in the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles w mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a key replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible.
Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
▶ Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
- the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
- the telephone application (e. g. for iPhone Android)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.
Vehicle remote closing
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
^3 The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off.
After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible.
▶ Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and switch on the ignition, the Door Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
- the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
- the telephone application (e. g. for iPhone Android)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
▶ Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency informed of the location of the vehicle.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center.
The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, the initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request Vehicle Diagnostics Received Start vehicle diagnostics? message appears in the display.
Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
▶ When the VehicleDDiagnostossPlease Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 125).
▶ If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message
num appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position.
The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
During this procedure, you will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active message.
If you select Canada the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely.
When the check is complete, the sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent.
Press theOK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transferring Data... message appears.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop.
This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle (is page 29).
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
Information on Roadside Assistance (▷ page 26).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer an save predefined routes in the navigation system.
A route can be prepared and sent by either customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see they you want to start route guidance? Destination Received destination has been saved in "Previous destinations". message on the multimedia system display. The route is saved.
▶ To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the play.
If you select, No the saved route can be call up later in the navigation menu.
▶ Select Start.
Route guidance starts.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called again.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the veh a message will be sent to the Customer Assi tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.
The data you receive contains the following information:
- the location where the speed limit was ex- ded
- the time at which the speed limit was excded
- the selected speed limit which was exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area.
These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink ^® garage door opener integrated hicle. In the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up is- to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that:
• have safety stop and reverse features and meet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
- HomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge)
More information on HomeLink and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity (▷ page 27).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Programming
Programming buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 290).
text_image
Diagram showing labeled parts of a device with numbered annotations and an inset magnified view highlighting four numbered components.Garage door remote control ⑤ is not included with the integrated garage door opener.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ Select one of buttons ② to ④ to use to control the garage door drive.
▶ To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ on the integrated garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp ① lights up yellow as soon as button ②, ③ or ④ is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp ① will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
▶ Release button ②, ③ or ④. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ To program the remote control: point garage door remote control ⑤ towards buttons ② to ④ on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
▶ Press and hold button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green.
When indicator lamp ① lights up green: programming is finished.
When indicator lamp ① flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code page 291).
▶ Release button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ for the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp ① lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 290).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you need to use the programming button on the drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 125).
▶ Get out of the vehicle.
▶ Press the programming button on the door drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
▶ Get into the vehicle.
▶ Press previously programmed button ②, ③ or ④ on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then complete.
Notes on programming the remote control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "breakions:
(or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows:
- if you live in Canada
- if you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps
▶ Press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ on the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.
▶ Release the button. u will door Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ Press button ⑥ of garage door remote control ⑤ for two seconds, then release it for two seconds.
▶ Press button ⑥ again for two seconds.
Repeat this sequence on button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green.
When indicator lamp ① lights up green: programming is finished.
When indicator lamp ① flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.
Release button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ of the garage door drive.
If indicator lamp ① lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instruc-
- Check the transmitter frequency used by re, garage door drive remote control ⑤ and the whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control ⑤ for the garage door drive. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which
operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz.
- Replace the batteries in garage door remote control ⑤. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control ⑤ will transmit strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener.
- When programming, hold remote control ⑤ at varying distances and angles and from b tons ② to ④ which you are programming. various angles at a distance between 2 and 8 inches (5 to 20 cm) or at the same angle at varying distances.
- If another remote control ⑤ is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control ⑤. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control ⑤.
- Note that some remote controls only transfor a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Pres button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ again before transmission ends.
- Align the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated to garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ Press buttons ②, ③ or ④ which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp ① lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp ① flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.
▶ Press button ②, ③ or ④ again if necessary
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 125).
▶ Press and hold buttons ② and ④.
Out The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
T and then green.
▶ Release buttons ② and ④.
The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.
Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back.
▶ Rear seats: slide the corresponding front aryseat forwards.
▶ To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
▶ Press studs ① onto retainers ②.
▶ To remove: pull the floormat from retainers ②.
▶ Remove the floormat.
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up what the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one within its range of movement.
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment:
- switch off the ignition
-
never reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area
-
remove jewelry and watches
- keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts
WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury.
Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.
Opening the hood
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior with a magnified inset showing a blue arrow pointing to the mode (no text or symbols visible)▶ Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.
▶ Pull release lever ① on the hood. The hood is released.
natural_image
Close-up of a Mercedes-Benz car with a highlighted route traffic sign (no text or symbols on the car itself)▶ Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood
▶ Lower the hood and let it fall from a height approximately 8 in (20 cm).
▶ Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.
Radiator
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover the radiator, for example with a winter front or bug cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may otherwise be inaccurate.
Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times.
Engine oil
Important safety notes
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
• park the vehicle on a level surface.
• the engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature.
if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil stick
text_image
Diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and a magnified circular detail showing internal components.Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine
text_image
Diagram of a car engine with numbered parts and an inset close-up showing a flight scene, likely from a technical or automotive context.Example: vehicles with a diesel engine
▶ Pull oil dipstick ① out of the dipstick guide tube.
▶ Wipe off oil dipstick ①.
▶ Slowly slide oil dipstick ① into the guide to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark ③ and mark ②, the oil level is correct.
▶ If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine
Adding engine oil
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. I oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful the environment.
diproducts is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system:
- Use of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system
- Replacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired
• Use of engine oil additives
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's dashboard with a highlighted control panel (no visible text or symbols)Example: engine oil cap
Turn cap ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on tube the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.
MAX
Replace cap ① on the filler neck and tighten clockwise.
③ Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
Oil Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (▷ page 296).
Further information on engine oil (▷ page 355).
If Additional service products
Important safety notes
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with a service system. Certain components in the engine compartment of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with the parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down an touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the car you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays of There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open t cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure.
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Checking coolant level
text_image
Diagram showing three labeled parts of a vehicle engine, with numbered annotations and a highlighted component.▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cool down.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the lock (▶ page 125).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice>(page 127).
▶ Check the coolant temperature gauge in the multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below 158 °F (70 °C).
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
- On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button ( page 127).
- Press the Start/Stop button (▷ page 127).
Slowly turn cap ① half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape.
Turn cap ① further counter-clockwise and remove it.
olf the coolant is at the level of marker bar ③ in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ②.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar ③ in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ②.
If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.
of further information on coolant, see >page 356).
Adding washer fluid to the windshie washer system
natural_image
Close-up of a car engine bay with a magnified inset showing the engine component (no visible text or symbols)Example: washer fluid reservoir
▶ To open: pull cap ① upwards by the tab.
▶ Add the premixed washer fluid.
To close: press cap ① onto the filler neck until it engages.
ignIfidhe washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid>(page 248).
Further information on windshield washer fluid (▷ page 357).
ASSYST PLUS
Service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level ( page 295).
The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.:
• Service A in .. Days
• Service A Due
• Service A Overdue by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service.
You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:
▶ Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.
or
▶ After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
▶ Press the ← or OK button on the steering wheel.
Displaying service messages
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Server menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the OK button.
The service due date appears in the multifunction display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example:
- regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
- if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances
- use in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
- if the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any the following:
- dry, rough or hard cloths
• abrasive cleaning agents - solvents
• cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.
Do not park your vehicle for a long period time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
^g Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork
Automatic car wash
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.
! Before driving into an automatic car wash, make sure that it is suitable for the dimensions of the vehicle. In particular, make sure that:
- there is enough ground clearance between the vehicle underbody and the guide rails of the automatic car wash.
f. the clearance width of the automatic car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is adequate (for further information on the width of the tire wall on the rear wheel, see "Technical data") - you enter the automatic car wash straight and in the center of the guide rails in order to avoid damaging the tires or wheel rims.
Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed. The exterior mirrors could otherwise be damaged.
When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations:
- when towing the vehicle
-ain the car wash
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless r Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! Make sure that:
- the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.
- the ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed).
- the windshield wiper switch is in position 0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
• Vehicles with a SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand.
• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels.
▶ Do not use hot water and do not wash the is vehicle in direct sunlight.
▶ Use a soft sponge to clean.
▶ Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
- Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
ortle jet of water.
▶ Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlets.
▶ Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.
▶ Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.
▶ Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.
Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N:
▶ Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni lock (> page 125).
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
▶ Depress and hold the brake pedal.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wa from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
Power washers
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt tion blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
- Tires
- Battery
- Connectors
- Lamps
- Seals
- Trim
- Ventilation slots
- Door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
• Electrical components
Damaged seals or electrical components can! The following may cause the paint to lead to leaks or failures. become shiny and thus reduce the matte
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
- stickers
- films
- magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop
▶ Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.
▶ Soak insect remains with insect remover rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
▶ Soak bird droppings with water and rinse the treated areas afterwards.
▶ Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
▶ Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
▶ Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the pain surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is
case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if paint has become dull, the paint cleanerm recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun of the hood while the hood is hot.
▶ Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the pa work quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine
! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect:
• strong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials
- frequent use of automatic car washes
- washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their by use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear off matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish.
The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo en-from the range of recommended and the approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
the
Cleaning the wheels
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period! of Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the time directly after cleaning, particularly after wiper blade could be damaged.
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked long period of time.
Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.
f! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the windows
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. The is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.
▶ Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield-wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
▶ Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield (▶ page 110).
▶ Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
▶ Fold the windshield wiper arms back again of before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.
▶ Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-heing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning vs. agent, e. g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the side running board
Do not clean the aluminum inserts of the side running board with alkaline or acidic cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. The aluminum inserts could otherwise be damaged.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a logo and numbered entry point (no text or symbols on the car itself)
natural_image
Front view of a car with visible exhaust hood and lane markings (no text or symbols)▶ Clean sensors ① of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera and camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera or 360° camera with a power washer.
natural_image
Side view of a car with a close-up inset showing the wheel dial and number 1 (no text or symbols on the car itself)▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ To clean the camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens ①.
360°camera: if you drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360° camera closes automatically.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. All of these components to cool down before touching them.
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 vehicles with black exhaust pipes: black chromed exhaust tips should not be polished with a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their black shine. For optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Commercially available engine and care oils are suitable for this.
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove the excess polish residue after polishing.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.
▶ Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
Environmental note
Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease environmentally responsible manner.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a p washer. Do not use solvents.
! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions.
natural_image
Front view of a silver car's side profile with a numbered marker pointing to the front wheel (no text or symbols on the car itself)cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
▶ Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.
▶ Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD verdisplay cleaner.
▶ Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes • stickers dirty or corroded. • films
▶ Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, e.g. with a wire brush.
▶ Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or brush.
▶ After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling ①.
▶ Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly.
You can also have the maintenance work the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch ried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
- films
- scented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic.
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.
▶ Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
▶nHeavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
• alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
• abrasive cleaning agents
• commercially-available household cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for examples:
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.
- differences in the texture
- marks caused by growth and injury - slight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
▶ Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
▶ Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean cover made out of real leather, artificial leather on DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensu that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions:
- Clean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth.
- Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked.
- Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
- clean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
are clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1 detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. - clean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 °F (80 °C) or in direct sunlight.
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
▶ Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.
▶ Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Where will I find...?
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example:
- Jack
- Wheel chock
- Lug wrench
- Ratchet wrench
- Alignment bolt
Vehicles with a TREFIT kit
text_image
Labeled diagram of a mechanical or electronic component with numbered parts for identification① Jack
② Folding wheel chock
③ Towing eye
④ Alignment bolt
⑤ Tire inflation compressor
⑥ Lug wrench
⑦ Ratchet wrench
⑧ Tire sealant filler bottle
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards (▷ page 276).
▶ Use the TREFIT kit (▷ page 308).
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
text_image
Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to different parts① Folding wheel chock
② Lug wrench
③ Alignment bolt
④ Towing eye
⑤ Jack
⑥ Ratchet wrench
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards (▷ page 276).
▶ Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel (▶ page 347).
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
- MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires
• a TREFIT kit (▷ page 306)
- an emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries)
Information on changing and mounting wheels (▷ page 341).
▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).
▶ If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
▶ Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: make sure that the normal vehicle level is selected (▶ page 171).
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the d er's door.
The on-board electronics now have status This is the same as the SmartKey having removed.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 125).
▶ Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone▶(page 127).
▶ Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being outside temperature
changed. Anyone who is not directly assis in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.
▶ Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trace conditions when doing so.
▶ Close the driver's door.
▶ Unload heavy luggage.
i Only operate the tire inflation compressor using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is turned off ▷(page 280).
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:
- observe the instructions in the display messages (>page 244).
- check the tire for damage.
- • if driving on, observe the following notes.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:
- vehicle speed
• road condition he is • outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
affmoderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index page 335).
• on-size
- type and
• the "MOExtended" mark
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
- you hear banging noises.
- the vehicle starts to shake.
- you see smoke and smell rubber.
- ESP ^ is intervening constantly.
- there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following:
- Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water.
- If the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
- If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant.
- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
TREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TREFIT to seal punctures of up the 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire P tread. You can use TREFIT at outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C).
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
Using the TREFIT kit
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
- there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above.
- the wheel rim is damaged.
- you have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
text_image
max.80 km/h max.50 mph TIREFF! ① ②P40.10-6339-31
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury.
▶ Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
▶ Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the cargo compartment floor (▷ page 306).
▶ Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
▶ Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
text_image
Diagram of a device with numbered components and a blue arrow indicating a flow or interaction between parts 1, 2, and 3.▶ Pull connector ④ with the cable and hose (out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
▶ Screw hose ⑤ onto flange ⑥ of tire sealant bottle ①.
▶ Place tire sealant bottle ① head downwards into recess ② of the tire inflation compressor.
text_image
7 8 P40.10-6915-2Remove the cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tire.
▶ Screw filler hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
▶ Insert connector ④ into the socket in the center console in the rear compartment on the socket in the cargo compartment.
Socket in the rear compartment: (▷ page 281)
Socket in the cargo compartment: (▷ page 281)
Only operate the tire inflation compressor ▶ using the socket in the rear compartment or in the cargo compartment, even if the ignition is turned off.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.
Observe the further information on sockets (▷ page 280).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock ( page 125).
▶ Press on and off switch ③ on the tire inflation compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (page 310).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 ps) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (page 309).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
_tv Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has no been attained after five minutes:
▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
In Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose.
▶ Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).
▶ Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.
! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TREFIT kit.
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) been attained after five minutes:
▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the⑩. faulty tire.
▶ Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Pull away immediately.
▶ Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the / tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least re 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the d USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.
To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.
text_image
out se c f 10 P40 10-4483-51has
to reduce the tire pressure: press pressure
release button ⑨ on the filler hose.
▶ The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge
he⑩.
(1)
fla-
(No text)
▶ When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the further information about ABS and ESP filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire see (▶ page 61) and (▶ page 64).
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of sealed tire.
▶ Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire tion compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle.
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist shop and have the tire changed there.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic
▶ Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon build-up. as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every The highly flammable gas mixture forms when four years at a qualified specialist workshop charging the battery as well as when jump-starting.
Battery (vehicle)
Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam
12 V battery - important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
- by wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers
- due to friction between clothing and seats
- if you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials
- if you wipe the battery with a cloth
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
- when braking
- in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar indent, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of inju Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face-guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified special workshop for more information.
! Always have work on batteries carried out a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, observe the following:
- secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolli away.
- switch off the ignition.
• always disconnect the negative terminal clamp first, followed by the positive terminal clamp.
After the battery has been disconnected, the transmission is locked in position P.
After the work has been done, install the tery and replace the cover of the positive minal clamp firmly.
Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
US can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
- set the clock; see the Digital Operator's Manual
On vehicles with a multimedia system and navigation system, the clock is set automatically.
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
air-starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (page 313).
- reset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirFt rors out once>(page 100).
▶ Open the hood.
▶ Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure ✝ page 313).
Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not clean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
Charging the 12 V battery
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
over, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/er-warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not with light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gas
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine compartment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points:
- The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
- Vehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
- Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
- Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
-
Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
-
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
• Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
• The jumper cables are not damaged.
- Bare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the cables are connected to the battery.
- The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
▶ Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster mus off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (▷ page 125).
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
▶ Open the hood.
text_image
Diagram showing car battery connections with numbered parts and zoomed-in insets highlighting key components.Position number ⑥ identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.
▶ Slide cover ① of positive terminal ② in the direction of the arrow.
Connect positive terminal ② on your vehicle to positive terminal ③ of donor battery ⑥ using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ② on your own vehicle first.
▶ Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
▶ Connect negative terminal ④ of donor battery ⑥ to ground point ⑤ of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle ⑥ first.
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
▶ First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ⑤ and negative terminal ④, then from positive clamp ② and positive terminal ③. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
▶ Close cover ① of positive terminal ② after removing the jumper cables.
▶ Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if:
• the engine is not running.
- the brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.
- there is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.
WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the:
• the towing eye could detach itself
- the vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weigh of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle tification plate ( page 351).
When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:
- when towing the vehicle
- in the car wash
! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if available. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope:
- Secure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles.
- Ensure that the tow cable is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow cable in the middle, e.g. with white doth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that the vehicle is being towed.
- Only secure the tow cable to the towing eye.
- Observe the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag.
- Do not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery or towing. Do not use the towing eye for recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a crane.
When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straight as possible and not at an acute angle. Excessive tractive power could damage the vehicles.
When towing, it is preferable to use a rigid towing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigid towing bar helps to keep the tractive power low.
When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.
! Vehicles with differential locks: make sure the differential locks are in automatic mode.
When towing, the differential locks must not the brackets for the screw-in towing eye are be switched on. The transmission may other located in the bumpers. They are at the front and wise be damaged. rear behind covers ①②.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.
▶ Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (▶ page 306).
▶ Press the mark on cover ① or ② inwards in the direction of the arrow.
Take cover ① or ② off the opening.
▶ Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it.
It is better to have the vehicle transported t to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you:
- cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in ignition lock
- cannot release the electric parking brake
- cannot shift the automatic transmission to position N
Disarm the automatic locking feature before vehicle is towed>(page 216). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
Removing the towing eye
▶ Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
▶ Front cover: position left-hand side of cover ① in the bumper and press it in on the right-hand side until it engages.
▶ Rear cover: position top of cover ② in the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages.
▶ Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
fowing a vehicle with both axles the ground
assistance
Briakodowg
The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock.
In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points:
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Depress and hold the brake pedal.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
▶ Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps (▷ page 106).
In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting
the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.
Transporting the vehicle
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
natural_image
Diagram of two cars on a road with a blue X mark, no text or symbols presentWhen the vehicle is loaded for transport, t front and rear axles must be stationary and the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged.
All vehicles
You may only secure the vehicle by the U-wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni lock.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it.
▶ Secure the vehicle.
Information on 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (▷ page 313).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (▶ page 313).
Fuses
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.
! For the fuse boxes in the engine compartment and under the rear bench seat, only use fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeing in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse box under the rear bench seatpage 320).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before changing a fuse
Observe the important safety notes (▷ page 318)
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers.
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO
▶ Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having removed.
The driver's door can be closed again.
▶ Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone▶(page 127).
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 145).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
- Fuse box on the front-passenger side of the dashboard
- Fuse box in the engine compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel
- Fuse box under the rear bench seat
Dashboard fuse box
Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover.
-Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
text_image
n the se cial- nz▶ Open the front-passenger door.
▶ Open the glove box.
▶ To open: pull cover ① outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
▶ To close: clip in cover ① on the front of the k. dashboard.
Make sure that the door seal is positioned over the cover.
▶ Fold cover ① inwards until it engages.
▶ Close the glove box.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.
text_image
Diagram of a car engine interior with labeled parts and a blue directional arrow indicating rotation or movement.▶ Open the hood (▷ page 294).
▶ Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.
▶ To open: open clamps ②.
▶ Fold cover ① up in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
▶ To close: check whether the seal is seated correctly in cover ①.
▶ Insert cover ① at the side of the fuse box into the retainers.
▶ Fold down cover ① and close clamps ②.
▶ Close the hood.
▶ Press down cover ① until the clamps engage audibly.
▶ Fold the right-hand rear bench seat back (▷ page 273).
Fuse box under the rear bench seat
text_image
① P54.15-3869.21▶ Fold the right-hand rear bench seat forward (▷ page 273).
▶ To open: lift off cover ① from the fuse box in the direction of the arrow.
The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box.
▶ To close: put cover ① on the fuse box.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct:
- designation
- model
When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct:
- designation
- manufacturer
- model
WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
- do not drive with a flat tire.
- immediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
- pay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your ve cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor- rectly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:
- suitability
- legal stipulations
• factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (▷ page 345).
You can ask for information regarding permitted used,eel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure information can be found:
- on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
- in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
• in the "Tire pressure" section
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual
ehandling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:
- cuts in the tires
- punctures
- tears in the tires
- bulges on tires
- deformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width the tire (page 322). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect t inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary>(page 324).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel ( page 346).
The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors:
- Driving style
- Tire pressure
- Distance covered
Notes on tire tread
WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the r of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
• Summer tires: 18 in (3 mm)
ar M+S tires: 16 in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.
text_image
of the the t ard TWI P60: 10-6373-31Marking ① shows where the bar indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately 116 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing tires
- Only mount tires and wheels of the same type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics)" section (▷ page 307).
risk Only mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels.
- Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance.
- Do not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
- Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel ( page 346).
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)
M+S tires
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with flat tire ▷(page 307).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you met tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than 18 in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident.
- M+S tires with a tread depth of less than 1 / 6 in (-4mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESRo function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on a wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section ( page 341).
Once the winter tires are mounted:
▶ Check the tire pressures (▷ page 327).
▶ Restart the tire pressure monitor (▷ page 328).
▶ Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system>page 328).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), the elasticity of summer tires and therefore also the In traction and braking capability are reduced cos
siderably. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-
Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Snow chains
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
- never install snow chains to the front wheels
- always install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.
! You must drive at raised vehicle level (heig 1) if snow chains have been installed. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
! Vehicles with ADS (Adaptive Damping System): do not use the sport mode when driving with snow chains mounted. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Install the snow chains on all driven wheels for maximum tractive power and driving stability. You own snow chains for two driven wheels to install the snow chains to the wheels on the axle. The vehicle then remains more stable under braking.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please the following points in mind:
- Snow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel/tire combinations ▷ page 345).
- Only use snow chains when driving on road completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.
- Local regulations may restrict the use of s chains. Observe the appropriate regulations you wish to mount snow chains.
- Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
- Never use Parking Pilot when snow chains installed (▶ page 177).
You may wish to deactivate E when pulling away with snow chains installed (page 65).
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action).
Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel ( page 346).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
WARNING
underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks:
- the tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
- the tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
• the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:
nlymonthly, at least rear
• if the load changes
• before beginning a long journey
earunder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
The data on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here.
Operation with emergency spare wheel: Information on operation with the emergency 'spare wheel can be found under "Emergency spare wheel" ▷(page 346).
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.
Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
text_image
1 TIRE CARDINE INFORMATION RENDEIGNEMENTS SUR LUIS PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT INSTRUMENTS COMPARATIONS NÉCOURS DE PACIFS 2015.1.1 PNEUS 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROFESSIONNEL 2015.1.1 PROCURÉA 2015/163 2016E-0007 30, 2004 90%, 201798 RÉDAIR 2015/133 2016E-0007 30, 2004 90%, 201798 D'ÉVAIR 2015/133 2016E-0007 30, 2004 90%, 201798 D'ÉVAIR 2015/133 2016E-0007 30, 2004 90%, 201798P40.00-2223-31
text_image
LUFTDRUCK PRESSURE PRESSION PRESION für kalte Rollen for cold tires des pneus froides de infiatico 100 kPa = 1 bar 195/55 R16 215/45 R17 215/40 R18 Warme Rollen: Warm tires up to: 30 ah 4 pct Pneus Anchauffes Jump/ir Neumaboue calentes NextarP40.00-2228-31
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.
① Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's sidepage 331).
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example).
text_image
COLD TIRE PRESSURE normal load maximum load Warm fires up to + 4 psi A212594-00-15 P40.00-2229-31
text_image
100 kPa = 1 bar R18 R19 300 gm/h 240 km/h 150 mph Warm Airflow (g) Warm Airflow (g) Wichardine: Water Tank Press Air Airflow (km) de inverter Press Airflow (km) per liter Airflow (km) per liter + 30 kWh + 6 psi + 30 kWh + 6 psiP40.00-2230-31
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewallpage 335). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values:
- if you want to drive with an increased load and/or
• if you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.
The tire pressure table contains the recommend if the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can ded pressures for cold tires for various operatead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed colon loss of pressure.
ditions.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fo#cialist workshop.
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example).
Important notes on tire pressure
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
- Check the tire for foreign objects.
- Check whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, tact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
- if the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three and
- if the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire bad. If the tire temperature changes by 18 °F (10 °C), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires:
- on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
- in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (▷ page 141)
- printed in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
• overheat, leading to tire defects
• adversely affect handling
- wear excessively and/or unevenly
• have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by the road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
- increase the braking distance
• adversely affect handling - wear excessively and/or unevenly
• have an adverse effect on ride comfort - be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
text_image
MAX. PERMISE INFLAT. PRESS. 420 KPA ( 40 PSI ) ING: 10-6375-31① Example: maximum permissible tire pressure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure page 324).
The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure (▷ page 324).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:
- on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
- in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler
• in the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows:
▶ Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.
▶ Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the valve.
▶ Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (▷ page 324).
▶ If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.
▶ If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker.
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
▶ Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section▶(page 328).
Important safety notes
dThe tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (▷ page 324).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the
same time cannot be detected by the tire pre- you wish to confirm the restart:
sure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if:
- snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires.
- road conditions are wintry.
- you are driving on sand or gravel.
- you adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates acceleration).
- you are driving with a heavy load (in the vcle or on the roof).
▶ Press the OK button. you The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is appears in the multifunction display. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Yes. Press the OK button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
▶ Press the ← button.
When the Ttric PrPressure NoNowKOK? message appears, press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Cancel.
▶ Press the OK button. The tire pressure values stored at the last n-restart will continue to be monitored.
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system you have:
• changed the tire pressure
- changed the wheels or tires
- mounted new wheels or tires
▶ Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored
▶ Also observe the notes in the section on time pressures (▶ page 324).
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position in the ignition lock page 125).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steel wheel to select the Serve menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display.
if Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the service of the multifunction display, see illustration (example).
text_image
29 29 31 31 (psi) P54.33-3823-31For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section ( page 330).
Important safety notes
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminate you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the mounting of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (page 324). Note that the correct tire pressure pres for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning test threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (page 330). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly.
and the tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (▷ page 324).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
- if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.
veh if the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (▷ page 244).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes or driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by pressure gauge are higher than those shown in the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electronically
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position in the ignition lock page 125).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steel wheel to select the Ser menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is sh in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure
of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning messages
Life the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
- If the Please Correct Tire Pressure The message appears in the multifunction display, or the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises.
by If the CcheckTires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped significantly. Then tires must be checked.
If the WailingTThereMafufunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked.
Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section ( page 244).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.
▶ Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar page 324).
You can find more tire pressure values for various operating conditions in the tire pressure table inside the fuel filler flap (▷ page 324).
▶ Make sure that the tire pressure is correct all four wheels.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position in the ignition lock.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steer wheel to select the Server menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message.
▶ Press the ▼ button.
The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
▶ Press the OK button. The TimePress. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. (2) After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
▶ Press the ← button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor
| Country | Radio type approval number |
| USA FCC | ID: MRXMW2433A |
| FCC ID: MRXGG4 | |
| FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 | |
| Canada IC: | 2546A-MW2433A |
| IC: 2546A-GG4 | |
| IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 |
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the steering wheel and seatbelt (no visible text or symbols)① B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating
text_image
TIRE CHAQUES INFORMATION RENSERCHAMMEN ET LE DES PRELIS ET LE CHARGEMENT TITLE: PRELIS PARMES 100% CHARGES 100% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMES 200% CHARGES PARMESSpecification for maximum gross vehicle weight ① is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loads and luggage must not exceed the specified value.
The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle of the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
text_image
TIRE CHOCINE INFORMATION MENSEIGNMENT SUR LES PRÉLIS ET LE CHARDÈMENT SEPARO PARANTI MAIRARE DE PLACES TOTAL P FROUET MAIRANT P MANUEL MAJELLY X RELIAT MAJELLY R This confirmed insight is in chargeable data rights, all known member wards. In place there are misappropriés de la collection of the parts previously decomposés. PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS PARS P40.00-2225-31Maximum number of seats ① indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
▶ Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.
▶ Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
▶ Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
▶ Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyi seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information page \$31). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Additional information when towing a trailerpage 200).
Step 1
| Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 | |||
| Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) |
Step 2
| Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 | |||
| Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) | 5 3 1 | ||
| Distribution of the occupants | Front: 2Rear: 3 | Front: 1Rear: 2 | Front: 1 |
| Weight of the occupants | Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg) | Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg) | Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg) |
| Gross weight of all occupants | 750 lbs (340 kg) | 540 lbs (245 kg) | 150 lbs (68 kg) |
Step 3
| Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 | |||
| Permissible load (maxi-mum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) | -1500 lbs (680 kg) -750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg) | -1500 lbs (680 kg) -540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg) | -1500 lbs (680 kg) -150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg) |
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo of fully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar the driver's side of the vehiclepage 331).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum section width.
mum permissible weight that can be carried by example:
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occAll passenger car tires must conform to the stat-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)utory safety requirements in addition to these weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. grades.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: ① tread wear grade, ② traction grade and
③ temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
aximum section width.
bExample:
• Treadwear grade: 200
•Traction grade: AA
Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The trailer load/noseweight is usually approximately 8% of the gross weight of the trailer and its cargo.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards
text_image
TREADWEAR 240 TRACTION B TEMPERATURE A ① ② ③ P40: 10-6376-3.1i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.
The traction grades - from highest to lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of 16 in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth ( page 322). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (▷ page 323).
Temperature
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.
① Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (▷ page 339)
② Department of Transportation, Tire Identification Number ▷(page 338)
③ Maximum load rating (▷ page 338)
④ Maximum tire pressures (▷ page 327)
⑤ Manufacturer
⑥ Tire material (▷ page 338)
⑦ Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating>(page 335)
⑧ Load index (▷ page 337)
⑨ Tire name
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. S
tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires mu meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law
The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate us from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required your vehicle.
text_image
225/55 R 16 95 H ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P#3:10-6378-31① Tire width
② Nominal aspect ratio in %
③ Tire code
④ Rim diameter
⑤ Load bearing index
⑥ Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall not contain any letters or may contain one that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.
Tire width: tire width ① shows the nominal tire width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ② is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height
Tire code: tire code ③ specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the s
for description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ④ is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index ⑤ is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side>(page 331).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, se-ppage 338).
For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" page 337).
Speed rating: speed rating ⑥ specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. may
eTire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
| Index | Speed | rating |
| _2Q | up to 100 | mph (160 km/h) |
| _3R | up to 106 | mph (170 km/h) |
| S | up to 112 | mph (180 km/h) |
| T | up to 118 | mph (190 km/h) |
| H | up to 130 | mph (210 km/h) |
| re | up to 149 | mph (240 km/h) |
| #V up to 168 mph (270 km/h) |
| nd |
| Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) |
| ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) |
| _ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) |
| ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) |
- Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man-An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). icle from exceeding the following speeds:
The service specification is made up of load bearing index ⑤ and speed rating ⑥.
d• All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG GLE 63): 130 mph (210 km/h)
- If the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications: ask the tire manufacturer in order to find the maximum speed.
- Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
• Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 with increased top speed: 174 mph (280 km/h)
If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (page 345).
- The size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example
Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
| Index | Speed | rating |
| Q | M+S | up to 100 mph (160 km/h) |
| T | M+S | up to 118 mph (190 km/h) |
| H | M+S | up to 130 mph (210 km/h) |
| V | M+S | up to 149 mph (240 km/h) |
load index
text_image
is an- 225/56 R 16 95 H P02.10-6379-31In addition to the load bearing index, load index ① may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed index ⑥ on the sidewall of the tire (page 335).
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires a
addition to the MPS marking, winter tires have the snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.
e• If no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire
- XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
• Light Load: represents a light load tire
• C, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
text_image
MAX. LOADRATING 710 KG (156S L3S) M P40.10-6380-2TMaximum tire load ① is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side▶(page 331).
The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.
requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ② provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires, see (▶ page 345).
Tire size: identifier ③ describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ④ can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture ⑤ provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32 in 2014.
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire characteristics
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
text_image
① DOT HW A7 ③ AMCW ④ ⑤ 1600 P40.10-638632
text_image
an- or on SIDEWALL : 2 PUES POLYSTER 5 PUES UNDER TREAD : 2 PUES POLYSTER + 2 PUES STEEL + 1.PY HYLOM ① ② P40:10-6372-31This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall ① and under tire tread ②.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders from the data in the example.
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ②, tire size ③, tire type code ④ and manufacturing date ⑤.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol ① marks that the tire complies with
Definition of terms for tires and loading
aTire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Speed rating
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds The speed rating is part of the tire identification. per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) specifies the speed range for which the tire is are the equivalent of 1 bar. approved.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of U S Department of Transportation.
the GTW is the weight of a trailer including the weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. on the trailer.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the veh is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tire with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall the tire.
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Recommended tire pressures
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbanoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.
onthe curb weight of the vehicle
- the weight of the accessories - the load limit
- the weight of the factory installed optional equipment
Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment
The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it actually installed on the vehicle or not.
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of .1 bar.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the mounted.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
eurb weight
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver side.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
tem and optional equipment if these are instaSidewall
led in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a t approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tir
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's suit.
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds Traction is the result of friction between the tires square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar and the road surface.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. TW
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
- if the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and
- if the vehicle has not been driven further 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
aSidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras tire is that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.
Jraction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
The TWR specifies the maximum permissible weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch can support.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 116 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distribution
with The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section (▷ page 306) contains information and notes how to deal with a flat tire. Information on ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a tire can be found under "MOExtended tires with run-flat characteristics"▷(page 307).
be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor page 328).
Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel:
Direction of rotation
the event of a flat tire, mount the emergency tires with a specified direction of rotation have spare wheel according to the description under additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- "Mounting a wheel" (page 341). Planing. These advantages can only be gained if
Rotating the wheels
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions.
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Preparing the vehicle
▶ Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: when mounting the emergency spare wheel on the event of a flat tire, follow the additional notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire" (▶ page 306).
▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
- Apply the electric parking brake manually. - Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position in P.
▶ Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: es in make sure that the normal vehicle level is selected (> page 171).
nd Switch off the engine.
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (▷ page 341).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 125).
▶ Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone>(page 127).
▶ If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Apart from certain country-specific variations, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example:
- Jack
- Wheel chock
- Lug wrench
Securing the vehicle to prevent it rolling away
natural_image
Mechanical component with blue directional arrow and circled number 1, no visible text or symbols
natural_image
Mechanical component with blue arrow indicating motion, no visible text or symbols
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with blue arrows indicating a step, no visible text or symbols
natural_image
Metal mechanical component with internal cavities, no visible text or symbolsIf your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock can be found in the tire-change tool kit (▷ page 306).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel.
▶ Fold both plates upwards ①.
▶ Fold out lower plate ②.
▶ Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into openings in base plate ③.
natural_image
Side profile of a modern SUV (no visible text or symbols)▶ Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Raising the vehicle
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
• To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
- The jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing k, maintenance work under the vehicle.
- Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.
• Before raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
- The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and then-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
- Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height.
- Make sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
- Do not place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle.
- Do not lie under the vehicle.
- Do not start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
- Never open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised.
- Make sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
natural_image
Close-up of a car tire with a blue directional arrow icon on the wheel (no text or symbols)
text_image
not ② ③ not ③ ④ P40.10-6639-31▶ Position jack ③ at jacking point ②.
text_image
the P40.00-2253-31▶ Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.
▶ Turn ratchet wrench ④ until jack ③ sits completely on jacking point ② and the b of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
theTurn ratchet wrench ④ until the tire is raised all a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
▶ Using lug wrench ①, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
natural_image
Side profile of a modern SUV with two blue arrows indicating upward motion, no text or symbols present.Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirt surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.
When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking.
The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows).
▶ Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
natural_image
Close-up of a car tire mounted on a lift with a visible angle marker (no text or symbols)▶ Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
▶ Screw alignment bolt ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
▶ Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
▶ Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts, when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (▷ page 341).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.
! Always use wheel bolts ② to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel could damage the brake system.
natural_image
Two metallic screw fasteners with hexagonal end caps, labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the parts themselves)① Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the factory and for the collapsible spare wheel (Mercedes-AMG GLE 63)
② Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel with blue directional arrows indicating motion or repair, next to a mechanical lift (no text or symbols)▶ Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
p faces.
▶ Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
▶ Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.
▶ Unscrew the alignment bolt.
▶ Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
▶ Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel (▶ page 349).
Only then lower the vehicle.
Lowering the vehicle
WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nut and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.
the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: before lowering the vehicle
inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.
▶ Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are ble.
▶ Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.
▶ Place the jack to one side.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P40.10-6642-31! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP ^® , and are marked as follows:
• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
- MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, who driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact ▶ Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (① to ⑤). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft(150 Nm).
▶ Turn the jack back to its initial position.
▶ Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor again.
▶ Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure (▷ page 324).
with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
When you are driving with the collapsible spareous damage cannot always be detected on wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz system or the tire pressure monitor cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if warning system or tire pressure monitor when
you have no information about their previous usage.
The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found:
• on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
• in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (▷ page 324).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle:
- with tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right)
- with the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additional equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
- adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
- never mount more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
-
only use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly.
-
do not switch ESPoff.
• have a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: only use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to the brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The damaged wheel on the front axle can then be replaced by the undamaged wheel from the rear axle.
Make sure to note the placard on the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
e. Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels.
General notes
You can ask for information regarding permitted emergency spare wheels at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mounting the emergency spare wheel is described under "Mounting a wheel" page 341). You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (page 324). The value on the wheel is valid.
An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel.
When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure lost vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency warning system or tire pressure monitor when spare wheel in the emergency spare the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after Always observe the instructions and safety mounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys-notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section tem may still display the tire pressure of the (▷ page 341).
removed wheel for a few minutes. The value of-vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound sys-played for the mounted emergency spare wheel, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.
Removing/stowing the emergency spare wheel
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel under the cargo compartment floor
Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (▷ page 341).
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor.
text_image
Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled ① and ②Removing the emergency spare wheel
▶ Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards (▷ page 276).
▶ Turn retaining screw ② counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ①.
text_image
① ② ③-Removing the emergency spare wheel
▶ Detach fastening straps ②.
▶ Unhook retaining spring hooks ① and ③ fastening straps ② from the cargo tie-dow rings.
▶ Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
▶ Open the emergency spare wheel bag and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
▶ Place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into the emergency spare wheel bag and close the emergency spare wheel bag.
▶ Place the emergency spare wheel bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into the cargo compartment with the carrying strap at the back.
▶ Hook retaining spring hooks ① and ③ of fastening straps ② into the cargo tie-down rings.
▶ Tighten fastening straps ②.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel under the cargo compartment floor ▶ Screw in retaining screw ② clockwise in the collapsible emergency wheel to the stop. ▶ Swing the cargo compartment floor down (8, page 27(1))
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle.
Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (▷ page 341).
The collapsible spare wheel can be found in stowage well under the cargo compartment floor.
text_image
Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled ① and ②Removing the emergency spare wheel
▶ Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards (▷ page 276).
▶ Unscrew retaining screw ② counter-clockwise.
Remove collapsible spare wheel ① from the spare wheel well.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel (▷ page 349).
Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into t
spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends Inflating the collapsible spare wheel that you have this work performed at a qualified page 349).
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
▶ Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
▶ If possible, unscrew the valve insert from valve and release the air.
i Fully deflating the tires can take a few minutes.
▶ Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
▶ Screw the valve cap back on.
▶ Lay collapsible spare wheel ① in the emergency spare wheel well.
the
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel bag
Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (▷ page 341).
On Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound system, the collapsible spare wheel is packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.
text_image
Diagram of a car rear bumper with numbered labels pointing to specific areas, likely for safety or repair instructions.Removing the emergency spare wheel
▶ Unhook retaining spring hooks ① of fastening strap ② from the cargo tie-down rings.
▶ Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the emergency collapsible spare wheel.
▶ Open the bag and remove the emergency collapsible spare wheel.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel (file page 349).
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
▶ Place the collapsible spare wheel into the emergency spare wheel bag and close the emergency spare wheel bag.
Place the emergency spare wheel bag with the collapsible spare wheel into the cargo compartment with the carrying strap at the back.
▶ Hook retaining spring hooks ① of fastening strap ② into the cargo tie-down rings.
▶ Tighten fastening strap ②.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel (Mercedes-AMG GLE 63)
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the tire inflation compressor label on the tire sealant bottle.
▶ Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (▶ page 341).
The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated.
▶ Remove the tire inflation compressor from the stowage space under the trunk floor (▷ page 306).
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P40 10-6444-31▶ Pull connector ④ and hose ⑥ out of the housing.
▶ Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel.
▶ Screw union nut ② of hose ⑥ onto the valve.
▶ Make sure on/off switch ⑤ of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.
▶ Insert connector ④ into the socket in the center console in the rear compartment or in the socket in the cargo compartment.
Socket in the rear compartment: (▷ page 281)
Socket in the cargo compartment: (▷ page 281)
Only operate the tire inflation compressor using the socket in the rear compartment or
in the cargo compartment, even if the ignition is turned off.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.
Observe the further information on sockets (▷ page 280).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (> page 125).
▶ Press on and off switch ⑤ on the tire inflation compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tiresi inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge ③.
▶ Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure. The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on and off switch ⑤ on the tire inflation compressor to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
▶ If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release valve button ① until the correct tire pressure has been reached.
▶ Unscrew union nut ② on hose ⑥ from the valve.
▶ Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again.
▶ Stow connector ④ and hose ⑥ in the lower section of the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.
Information regarding technical dat
The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)
WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example:
- if the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna
- the exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of transmitters are not observed.
In particular, the following conditions must be complied with:
- only approved wavebands may be used.
- observe the maximum permissible output in these wavebands.
- only approved antenna positions may be used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields.
The following antenna positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly installed:
text_image
ed ① ② P62.70-7727-31Approved antenna positions
① Rear roof area
② Rear fender
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment).
Observe the legal requirements for accessory parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values:
| Frequency band Maximum | |
| transmission output | |
| Short wave3 - 54 MHz | 100 W |
| 4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz | 30 W |
| 2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz | 50 W |
| Trunked radio system/Tetra380 - 460 MHz | 10 W |
| 70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz | 35 W |
| Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G) | 10 W |
The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:
- RF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
- RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra)
• Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands:
- Trunked radio system/Tetra
- 70 cm waveband
- 2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the seat, side door, and driver's seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)▶ Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate ①.
text_image
MFD BY MERCEDES-BENZ U.S. INTL., INC NASCALYSIS COUNTY NUMBER 204 NEW PROJECT FOR CHAPES AS: 157 (PTC) (SCHWAN) 12/07 S172 NO. DATE: 14/00 3086 295/35 ZR21 10x21 250(35) 24/00 14/95 3527 295/35 ZR21 10x21 280(41) DATE: 2830/6239 WEALTH CONFORM TO ALL APPLICABLE SHEET MEETING SERVICE SAFETY IN BEANS EXCEPT ON THE DATE OF INFRASTRUCTURE SHOWN BY:\ WDCG-76-07A123453 MPV P00.01-3924-31Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
② Paint code
③ VIN
text_image
MERCEDES-BENZ U.S. INTL., INC KG TUES BAR SIZE COLD KINNERS GASIL/PHEE FRONT/UN 1470 265/60 R18 8.0x18 220(32) GASIL/PHEE BEAR/LAB 1800 265/60 R18 8.0x18 260(38) OVER/PHEE 3150 10/07 MPV/VTUM C172 ② MANUFACTURED UNDER CONTRACT FOR SABILELL AG WDCGF76E07A223811- ③ P00:01-3665-31Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
② Paint code
③ VIN
The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate
from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.
Service products and filling capacities
Important safety notes
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a blue icon and number 1, no visible text or symbols on the device itself.▶ Open the front right-hand door.
▶ Open cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
You will see the VIN.
The VIN can also be found in the following tions:
- on the lower edge of the windshield (▷ page 352)
- on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 351)
Engine number
text_image
Diagram of a car engine bay with numbered parts and a blue arrow indicating a component or issue.① Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and fornian emissions standards
② Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)
③ VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
① Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and fornian emissions standards
② Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)
③ VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
- Fuels
Exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF
- Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
- Coolant
- Brake fluid
• Windshield washer fluid
• Climate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must match. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container:
• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other identifications, for example:
• 0 W-30
- 5 W-30
- 5 W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.
| Model Of which | reserve |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | Approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l) |
| All other models | Approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l) |
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fu vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
- Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
- If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
| Model Total capa- | city |
| All models | 24.6 US gal (93.0 l) |
Gasoline
Fuel grade
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.
! Do not use the following:
• E15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)
• E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
• E100 (100% ethanol)
• M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
• M30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
• M85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
• M100 (100% methanol)
• Gasoline with metalliferous additives
- Diesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle.
! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable Diesel
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following pre-Fuel grade cautions:
- Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-ymium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.
- Do not drive at the maximum speed.
- Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.
Fuel grade
WARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
You will usually find information about the fuel with diesel fuel. grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. ! Only use Ultr
For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. Information on refueling▶(page 140).
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In such case and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.
! Only use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD), otherwise it may lead to increased wear and damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.
! Do not use the following:
- gasoline
• diesel with a bio-diesel content greater than 5% (e.g. B20) - bio-diesel
- vegetable oil
- paraffin
- kerosene
- marine diesel
- heating oil
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur.
be
In countries outside USA and Canada, only uses sulfur-free diesel with a sulfur content tion under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged.
^2 You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
Information on refueling>(page 140).
Low outside temperatures
Diesel fuel with improved cold flow properties is available during the winter months. Further information about fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas stations.
DEF
Important safety notes
Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling DEF page 352). DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
- not poisonous
• colorless and odorless - not flammable
When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.
Low outside temperatures
DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately 12 °F (-11 °C). The vehicle is delivered from the factory equipped with a DEF preheating system. Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even if at temperatures below 12 °F (-11 °C).
Additives
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
Purity
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other services safety notes on service products ( page 352).
products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to:
- increased emission values
• damage to the catalytic converter - engine damage
- malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during repair work, it must not be returned to the tank.
The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed.
Filling capacities
| Model Total capacity | |
| All models | 8.4 US gal(31.8 l) |
Engine oil
General notes
text_image
and y the Mercedes-Benz Oil recommended N18.00-2776-31! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aft treatment.
Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (▷ page 352).
The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.
| Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval | |
| All models | 229.5 |
| Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval | |
| GLE 350 d 4MATIC Coupe | 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 |
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: only use SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.
| Model Capacity | |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) |
| Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC Coupe | 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) |
| All other models | 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) |
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brj fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in a brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.
Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid (▷ page 352).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop in accordance with the replacement intervals and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
!e Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even the countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety notes for vice products when handling coolant (▷ page 352).
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following:
• Anti-corrosion protection
- Antifreeze protection
- Raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down -35 °F (-37 °C), the boiling point of the cool during operation is approximately 266 °F (130 °C).
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:
- be at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C).
- not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 °F [-45 °C]). Otherwise, heat will not dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.
Filling capacities
| Model Capacity | |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | Approx. 11.9 US qt (11.3 l) |
| GLE 350 d 4MATIC Coupe | Approx. 12.2 US qt (11.5 l) |
| All other models |
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury.
tMake sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products t(>page 352).
At temperatures above freezing:
▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water at temperatures below freezing:
▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. - For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R-134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.
! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, the heights specified may vary as a result of must be adhered to. - tires
Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Refrigerant instruction label
text_image
① R-134a 550 ± 10g A 001 989 08 03 (PAG) DAIMLER AG SAE J639 A 246 817 15 20 P00.10-5361-31Example: refrigerant instruction label
① Warning symbol
② Refrigerant filling capacity
③ Applicable standards
④ PAG oil part number
⑤ Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol ① advises you about:
- Possible dangers
• Having service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop
Filling capacities
| All models Capacity | |
| Refrigerant | 37.0 ± 0.4 oz(1050 ± 10 g) |
| PAG oil | 3.9 ± 0.4 oz(110 ± 10 g) |
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
the heights specified may vary as a result of
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
- optional equipment reduces the maximum payload.
Observe the information relating to level control:
- AIRMATIC package (▷ page 171)
Dimensions and weights
text_image
① ② P72.20-3272-31| 1 Opening height | 2 Max. headroom | |
| Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S4MATIC Coupe | 77.6 in (1971 mm) |
| All other models with: | 1 Opening height | 2 Max. headroom |
| Steel suspension | 90.4 in (2296 mm) | 78.2 in (1986 mm) |
| AIRMATIC package | 89.3 in - 91.8 in (2267 mm - 2332 mm) | 76.7 in - 79.6 in (1947 mm - 2022 mm) |
| Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 | |
| Vehicle length | 193.6 in(4918 mm) |
| Vehicle height | 67.6 in(1718 mm) |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 83.8 in(2129 mm) |
| Wheelbase | 114.8 in(2915 mm) |
| Minimum ground clearance | 8.0 in(202 mm) |
| Turning radius | 38.7 ft(11.80 m) |
| Maximum roof load | 165.3 lb(75 kg) |
| All other models | |
| Vehicle length, Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC Coupe | 192.6 in (4891 mm) |
| Vehicle length, all other models | 192.9 in (4900 mm) |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 83.8 in (2129 mm) |
| Maximum vehicle height (steel suspension) | 68.1 in (1731 mm) |
| Maximum vehicle height (AIRMATIC package) | 69.6 in (1769 mm) |
| Minimum vehicle height (AIRMATIC package) | 67.7 in (1719 mm) |
| Wheelbase | 114.8 in (2915 mm) |
| Maximum ground clearance (steel suspension) | 8.1 in (206 mm) |
| Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC package) | 9.8 in (248 mm) |
| Minimum ground clearance (AIRMATIC package) | 6.8 in (173 mm) |
| All other models | |
| Turning radius | 38.7 ft(11.80 m) |
| Maximum roof load | 165.3 lb(75 kg) |
Vehicle width to the outer tire sidewalls
natural_image
Top-down view of a car's rear bumper and side profile, showing no text or symbols on the vehicle itselfMissing values were not available at time of going to print.
| 1Vehicle width to the outer tire sidewalls (rear axle) | |
| All-round tires | |
| Mixed size tires |
The vehicle widths specified may differ depending on:
- tires
- load
• condition of the suspension
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Fording depth
! The depth of water must not exceed the value specified in the table. Note that the possible fording depth is less in flowing water.
natural_image
Side profile of a modern SUV on a mountain road, showing elevation and side profile (no text or symbols)① Fording depth
On vehicles with the AIRMATIC package, loads up to the maximum permissible load have no influence on fording capability.
Missing values were not available at the time going to print.
All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG body-styling)
| 1 | 2 | |
| Steel-sprung vehicles | 22^ 24^ | |
| Vehicles with theAIRMATICpackage | ||
| Normal level 22^ 24^ | ||
| Raised level 26^ 27^ | ||
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | ||
| Raised level 22^ 24^ | ||
| Fording depth | |
| Steel-sprung vehicles | 19.7 in (50 cm) |
| Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package | |
| Raised level 19.7 in | (50 cm) |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | |
| Raised level 19.7 in | (50 cm) |
For more information about off-road fording, see (▷ page 152).
Vehicles with AMG bodystyling
| 1 | 2 | |
| Steel-sprung vehicles | 23^ 24^ | |
| Vehicles with theAIRMATICpackage | ||
| Normal level 23^ 24^ | ||
| Raised level 26^ 27^ |
For further information about approach/departure angles, see>(page 156).
text_image
Approach/departure angle ① ②Maximum gradient-climbing capability
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability depends on the off-road conditions and the road surface conditions.
The maximum gradient climbing ability is 80 %.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the wheels do not spin when driving on steep terrain.
If the load on the front axle is reduced when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recognizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque is increased, making it easier to drive off.
For further information about the maximum gradient climbing ability, see page 156).
Trailer tow hitch
Mounting dimensions
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system and drive tr may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame.
| a GLE 350 d 4MATIC Coupe | 7198 lbs (3265 kg) |
| Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC Coupe | |
| Mercedes- AMG GLE 63 S 4MA TIC Coupe | 6724 lbs (3050 kg) |
Maximum drawbar noseweight
The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included in the towing weight.
text_image
Technical mechanical drawing with dimension annotations and numbered components① Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch
② Rear axle center line
| GLE 350 d 4MATIC Coupe | 575 lbs (261 kg) |
| Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC Coupe | |
| Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC Coupe | 309 lbs (140 kg) |
The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose weight is the maximum weight with which the trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
Trailer loads
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)
Missing values were not available at the time going to print.
Gross rear axle weight rating when growing a trailer
| GLE 350 d 4MATIC Coupe | 3527 lbs (1600 kg) |
| Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC Coupe of | |
| Mercedes- AMG GLE 63 S 4MA TIC Coupe | 3791 lbs (1720 kg) |
Ball position of the ball coupling
text_image
7,5" 2" 2,75" P00.01-4229-31When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions stated in the illustration must not be exceeded.